List of related manuals

GENERAL MANUALS

RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User's Manual

3AFE64504215 (English)

SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter User's Manual

ACS550-01/U1 User's Manual (0.75…160 kW) /

3AUA0000042896 (English)

(1…200 hp)

3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418 ) (English)

Typical contents

• Safety

Flange Mounting Instructions

• Installation

Kit, IP21 / UL type 1

Frame size Code (English)

• Programming/Start-up

FMK-A-R1

100000982

• Diagnostics

FMK-A-R2

100000984

• Technical data

FMK-A-R3

100000986

FMK-A-R4

100000988

MAINTENANCE MANUALS

AC8-FLNGMT-R5 ¹

ACS800-

AC8-FLNGMT-R6

PNTG01U-EN

Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50, ACS55,

1. Not available for ACS550-01 series

ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, ACS550, ACH550

and R1-R4 OINT-/SINT-boards

Kit, IP54 / UL type 12

Frame size Code (English)

3AFE68735190 (English)

FMK-B-R1

FMK-B-R2

FMK-B-R3

FMK-B-R4

OPTION MANUALS

(delivered with optional equipment)

MFDT-01 FlashDrop User's Manual

3AFE68591074 (English)

OHDI-01 115/230 V Digital Input Module User's Manual

3AUA0000003101 (English)

OREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's

Manual

3AUA0000001935 (English)

OTAC-01 User’s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface

Module User’s Manual

3AUA0000001938 (English)

RCAN-01 CANopen Adapter User's Manual

3AFE64504231 (English)

CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation

e.V.

RCNA-01 ControlNet Adapter User's Manual

3AFE64506005 (English)

ControlNet™ is a trademark of ODVA™.

RDNA-01 DeviceNet Adapter User's Manual

DeviceNet™ is a trademark of ODVA™.

3AFE64504223 (English)

DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User

RECA-01 EtherCAT Adapter Module User's Manual

Group e.V.

3AUA0000043520 (English)

EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented

REPL-01 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module

technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,

User's Manual

Germany.

3AUA0000052289 (English)

EtherNet/IP™ is a trademark of ODVA™.

REPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module

ETHERNET POWERLINK is a trademark of Bernecker +

User's Manual

Rainer Industrie-ElektronikGes.m.b.H.

3AUA0000090411 (English)

Modbus and Modbus/TCP are registered trademarks of

RETA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

Schneider Automation Inc.

3AFE64539736 (English)

PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO are

RETA-02 Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual

3AFE68895383 (English)

registered trademarks of Profibus International.

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Safety instructions

Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual:

• Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a

subject.

• Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death

and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. The

warning symbols are used as follows:

Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical

injury and/or damage to the equipment.

General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity,

which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

General safety

WARNING! Obey these instructions. If you ignore them, injury or death, or damage

to the equipment can occur.

• Use safety shoes to avoid foot injury.

• Handle the drive carefully.

• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks, remain hot for a while

after disconnection of the electrical supply. See chapter Technical data on page

277.

• Keep the drive in its package or protect it otherwise from dust and burr from

drilling and grinding until you install it. Protect also the installed drive against dust

and burr. Electrically conductive debris inside the drive can cause damage or

malfunction.

Electrical safety

WARNING! The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a

qualified electrician.

WARNING! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the

power circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and, depending on the frame

size, UDC+ and UDC-, or BRK+ and BRK-.

Safety instructions

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After

disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5 minutes (to let the intermediate circuit

capacitors discharge) before removing the cover.

WARNING! Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the

ACS550, there may be dangerous voltage (from external sources) on the terminals

of the relay outputs RO1…RO3.

WARNING! When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in

parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a

single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply.

WARNING! If you install the drive on an IT system (an ungrounded power system or

a high-resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power system), disconnect the internal

EMC filter, otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the

EMC filter capacitors. This can cause danger or damage the drive.

If you install the drive on a corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the internal EMC

filter, otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC

filter capacitors. This will damage the drive.

Note: Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and

reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably.

See section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27. Also see sections IT

systems on page 286 and Corner-grounded TN systems on page 285.

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.

Maintenance

WARNING! The ACS550-01/U1 is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a

malfunctioning drive; contact your local ABB representative for replacement.

Safety instructions

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Table of contents

List of related manuals

Safety instructions

Use of warnings and notes

General safety

Electrical safety

Maintenance

Control of the drive and motor

Table of contents

Contents of this manual

Compatibility

Intended use

Intended audience

Installation

Installation flow chart

Preparing for installation

Installing the drive

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

How to start up the drive

How to control the drive through the I/O interface

How to perform the ID Run

Control panels

About control panels

Compatibility

Assistant Control Panel

Basic Control Panel

Application macros

ABB Standard macro

3-wire macro

Alternate macro

Motor Potentiometer macro

Hand-Auto macro

PID Control macro

PFC macro

Torque Control macro

Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors

Connection for obtaining 0…10 V from analog outputs

User parameter sets

Table of contents

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Macro default values for parameters

Parameters

Complete parameter list

Complete parameter descriptions

106

Embedded fieldbus

Overview

203

Planning

204

Mechanical and electrical installation - EFB

204

Communication set-up - EFB

205

Activate drive control functions - EFB

207

Feedback from the drive - EFB

211

Diagnostics - EFB

212

Modbus protocol technical data

215

ABB control profiles technical data

224

Fieldbus adapter

Overview

237

Planning

239

Mechanical and electrical installation - FBA

240

Communication set-up - FBA

241

Activate drive control functions - FBA

241

Feedback from the drive - FBA

244

Diagnostics - FBA

245

ABB Drives profile technical data

248

Generic profile technical data

256

Diagnostics

Diagnostic displays

259

Correcting faults

260

Correcting alarms

266

Maintenance

Maintenance intervals

271

Heatsink

271

Main fan replacement

272

Internal enclosure fan replacement

274

Capacitors

275

Control panel

275

Technical data

Ratings

277

Input power connections

281

Motor connections

289

Brake components

295

Control connections

299

Efficiency

300

Losses, cooling data and noise

301

Table of contents

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Installation

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

WARNING! Before you begin read chapter Safety instructions on page 5.

Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable

local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any

installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if

the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience

problems that the warranty does not cover.

Installation flow chart

The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below.

The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each step are

references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive.

Task

See

PREPARE for installation

Preparing for installation on page 16

PREPARE the mounting location

Prepare the mounting location on page 20

REMOVE the front cover

Remove the front cover on page 21

MOUNT the drive

Mount the drive on page 22

INSTALL wiring

Wiring overview on page 23 and

Check the insulation of the assembly on page 30

CHECK installation

Check installation on page 35

REINSTALL the cover

Reinstall the cover on page 36

START-UP

How to start up the drive on page 37

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Preparing for installation

Lifting the drive

Lift the drive only by the metal

chassis.

Unpacking the drive

1. Unpack the drive.

2. Check for any damage and

notify the shipper immediately

if damaged components are

found.

IP2040

3. Check the contents against

the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received.

Drive identification

Drive labels

To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:

• serial number label attached on upper part of the choke plate between the

mounting holes, or

Type designation

Serial number

• type designation label attached on the heat sink - on the right side of the drive

cover. Two examples of the type designation label are given below.

Serial number

Type designation

Serial number

Type designation

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

The labels contain information on the Type designation (page 17), Ratings and frame

size (page 17), Serial number (page 17), degree of protection (see also Degrees of

protection on page 306) and valid markings (see also Markings on page 309).

Type designation

Use the following chart to interpret the type designation found on both the type

designation and the serial number label.

ACS550-01-08A8-4+J404+…

AC, Standard Drive - 550 product series

Construction (region specific)

01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance

U1= Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance

Output current rating

e.g. 08A8 = 8.8 A, see section Ratings on page 277 for details

Voltage rating

2 = 208…240 VAC

4 = 380…480 VAC

6 = 500…600 VAC

Options

Examples of options:

B055 = IP54 / UL type 12 (no specification = IP21 / UL type 1).

UL type 12 is not available for type ACS550-01-290A-4.

0J400 = No control panel

J404

= ACS-CP-C Basic Control Panel

L511

= OREL-01

Relay output extension

K451 = RDNA-01

DeviceNet

K454 = RPBA-01

PROFIBUS DP

Ratings and frame size

The chart in section Ratings on page 277 lists technical specifications and identifies

the drive’s frame size - significant, since some instructions in this document vary,

depending on the drive’s frame size. To read the ratings table, you need the “Output

current rating” entry from the type designation. Also, when using the ratings table,

note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive’s “Voltage rating”.

Serial number

The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below.

Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX, where

Country of manufacture

YY:

Year of manufacture

WW:

Week of manufacture; 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …

XXXXX:

Integer starting every week from 00001.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Motor compatibility

The motor, drive and supply power must be compatible:

Motor

Verify

Reference

specification

Motor type

3-phase induction motor

Nominal current

Motor value is within this

• Type designation label on drive, entry for

range: 0.2…2.0 · I_2hd

Output I_2hd, or

(I_2hd= drive heavy duty

• Type designation on drive and rating table in

current)

chapter Technical data on page 277.

Nominal frequency

10…500 Hz

Voltage range

Motor is compatible with

208…240 V (for ACS550-X1-XXXX-2) or

the ACS550 voltage range.

380…480 V (for ACS550-X1-XXXX-4) or

500…600 V (for ACS550-U1-XXXX-6)

Insulation

500…600 V drives: Either

For ACS550-U1-XXXX-6

the motor complies with

NEMA MG1 Part 31, or a

du/dt filter is used between

the motor and drive.

Tools required

To install the ACS550 you need the following:

• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)

• wire stripper

• tape measure

• drill

• for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 / UL type

12 enclosures: punch for creating conduit mounting holes

• for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame size R6: appropriate crimping tool

for power cable lugs. See section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size

on page 287.

• mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The type of hardware

depends on the mounting surface and the frame size. For the dimensions and

weights of the frames, see Dimensions and weights on page 303.

Frame size

Mounting hardware

R1…R4

#10

1/4 in

5/16 in

Suitable environment and enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To prevent damage

prior to installation, store and transport the drive according to the environmental

requirements specified for storage and transportation. See section Ambient

conditions on page 307.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate, based on the site contamination level:

• IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure: The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive

gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as dripping water,

condensation, carbon dust and metallic particles.

• IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure: This enclosure provides protection from airborne

dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.

• If, for some reason, an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or

cover, or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood, see the note in chapter

Technical data, page 310.

Suitable mounting location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints:

• The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth, solid surface, and in a suitable

environment as defined above. For horizontal installation, contact your local ABB

representative for more information.

• The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions (see

section Outside dimensions on page 304), plus air flow space around the drive

(see section Losses, cooling data and noise on page 301).

• The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor

cable length. See section Motor connection specifications on page 289.

• The mounting site must support the drive’s modest weight. See section Weight on

page 306.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Installing the drive

WARNING! Before installing the ACS550, ensure the input power supply to the drive

is off.

For flange mounting (mounting the drive in a cooling air duct), see the appropriate

Flange Mounting Instructions:

IP21 / UL type 1

IP54 / UL type 12

Frame size

Kit

Code (English)

Kit

Code (English)

FMK-A-R1

100000982

FMK-B-R1

100000990

FMK-A-R2

100000984

FMK-B-R2

100000992

FMK-A-R3

100000986

FMK-B-R3

100000994

FMK-A-R4

100000988

FMK-B-R4

100000996

AC8-FLNGMT-R5 ¹

ACS800-PNTG01U-

AC8-FLNGMT-R6 ¹

1. Not available in ACS550-01 series.

Prepare the mounting location

The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the

requirements defined in section Preparing for installation

on page 16 are met.

1. Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of

the mounting template provided with the drive.

X0002

2. Drill the holes.

Note: Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top. Use only two. If

possible, use the two outside holes (to allow room to remove the fan for

maintenance).

Note: ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes. For R1 and

R2 frame sizes, the mounting holes are identical. For R3 and R4 frame sizes, the

inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Mount the drive

IP21 / UL type 1

1. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or

bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top).

2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning

sticker in the appropriate language over the existing

warning on the top of the module.

IP2002

IP54 / UL type 12

For the IP54 / UL type 12 enclosures, rubber plugs are required in the holes

provided for access to the drive mounting slots.

1. As required for access, remove the rubber plugs.

Push plugs out from the back of the drive.

2. R5 & R6: Align the sheet metal hood (not shown) in

front of the drive’s top mounting holes. (Attach as

part of next step.)

1, 4

3. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or

bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top).

4. Reinstall the rubber plugs.

5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language

over the existing warning on the top of the module.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Wiring overview

Conduit/Gland kit

Wiring drives with the IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit/gland kit with the

following items:

• conduit/gland box

• five (5) cable clamps (ACS550-01 only)

• screws

• cover.

The kit is included with IP21 / UL type 1 enclosures.

Wiring requirements

WARNING! Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550. The drive must

be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in

section Preparing for installation on page 16. If in doubt, contact your local ABB

representative.

As you install the wiring, observe the following:

•

There are four sets of wiring instructions - one set for each combination of drive

enclosure type (IP21 / UL type and IP54 / UL type 12) and wiring type (conduit or

cable). Be sure to select the appropriate procedure.

•

Determine electro-magnetic compliance (EMC) requirements per local codes.

See section Motor cable requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance on page 293.

In general:

- Follow local codes for cable size.

- Keep these four classes of wiring separated: input power wiring, motor wiring,

control/communications wiring and braking unit wiring.

•

When installing input power and motor wiring, refer to the following, as

appropriate:

Terminal

Description

Specifications and notes

U1, V1, W1¹

3-phase power supply input

Input power connections on page 281

Protective Ground

Ground connections on page 285

U2, V2, W2

Power output to motor

Motor connections on page 289

¹ The ACS550 -x1-xxxx-2 (208…240 V series) can be used with a single phase supply, if output

current is derated by 50%. For single phase supply voltage, connect power at U1 and W1.

•

To locate input power and motor connection terminals, see section Power

connection diagrams on page 25. For specifications on power terminals, see

section Drive’s power connection terminals on page 286.

•

For corner-grounded TN systems, see section Corner-grounded TN systems on

page 285.

•

For IT systems, see section IT systems on page 286.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

•

For frame size R6, see section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame size on

page 287 to install the appropriate cable lugs.

•

For drives using braking (optional), refer to the following, as appropriate:

Frame size

Terminal

Description

Braking accessory

R1, R2

BRK+, BRK-

Braking resistor

Braking resistor. See section Brake

components on page 295.

R3, R4, R5, R6

UDC+, UDC-

DC bus

Contact your ABB representative to

order either:

• braking unit or

• chopper and resistor

•

When installing control wiring, refer to the following chapters or sections, as

appropriate:

- Control terminals table on page 28

- Control connections on page 299

- Application macros on page 77

- Complete parameter descriptions on page 106

- Embedded fieldbus on page 203

- Fieldbus adapter on page 237.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Power connection diagrams

The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3, which, in

general, applies to frame sizes R1…R6, except for the R5/R6 power and ground

terminals.

J1 - DIP switches for analog inputs (two types can be used)

Diagram shows the R3 frame.

AI1: (in voltage position)

Other frames have similar layouts.

AI2: (in current position)

Panel connector

X1 - Analog inputs and outputs

(and 10 V ref. voltage output)

FlashDrop option

X1 - Digital inputs

Power LED (green)

(and 24 V aux. voltage output)

Fault LED (red)

X1 - Relay outputs

J2 - DIP switch

for RS485 termination

Optional module 1

X1 - Communications

(RS485)

Optional module 2

off position

on position

Power input

Power output to motor

(U1, V1, W1)

(U2, V2, W2)

Frame sizes

R5/R6 differ.

See

EM3

next page.

EM1

GND

3AUA0000001571

Optional braking

Frame

Terminal

Brake options

size

labels

R1, R2

BRK+, BRK-

Brake resistor

R3, R4

UDC+, UDC-

• Braking unit

• Chopper and resistor

WARNING! To avoid danger, or damage to the drive, on IT systems and corner-

grounded TN systems, see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Disconnecting the internal EMC filter

On certain types of systems, you must disconnect the internal EMC filter, otherwise

the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors,

which might cause danger, or damage the drive.

Note: Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and

reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably.

The following table shows the installation rules for the EMC filter screws in order to

connect or disconnect the filter, depending on the system type and the frame size.

For more information on the different system types, see IT systems on page 286 and

Corner-grounded TN systems on page 285.

The locations of screws EM1 and EM3 are shown in the diagram on page 25. The

locations of screws F1 and F2 are shown in the diagram on page 26.

Symmetrically

IT systems (ungrounded

Frame

Corner-grounded

Screw

grounded TN systems

or high-resistance-

sizes

TN systems

(TN-S systems)

grounded [> 30 ohm])

EM1

R1…R3

EM3¹

EM1

EM3¹

R5…R6

x = Install the screw. (EMC filter will be connected.)

= Replace the screw with the provided polyamide screw. (EMC filter will be disconnected.)

- = Remove the screw. (EMC filter will be disconnected.)

¹ ACS550-U1 drives are shipped with screw EM3 already removed.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Control terminals table

The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive.

Hardware description

SCR

Terminal for signal cable shield (screen). (Connected internally to chassis ground.)

AI1

Analog input channel 1, programmable. Default² = frequency reference. Resolution

0.1%, accuracy ±1%.

Two different DIP switch types can be used.

J1: AI1 OFF: 0…10 V (R_i = 312 kohm)

J1: AI1 ON: 0…20 mA (R_i = 100 ohm)

AGND

Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).

+10 V

Potentiometer reference source: 10 V ±2%, max. 10 mA (1 kohm < R < 10 kohm).

AI2

Analog input channel 2, programmable. Default² = not used. Resolution 0.1%,

accuracy ±1%.

Two different DIP switch types can be used.

J1: AI2 OFF: 0…10 V (R_i = 312 kohm)

J1: AI2 ON: 0…20 mA (R_i = 100 ohm)

AGND

Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).

AO1

Analog output, programmable. Default² = frequency. 0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm).

Accuracy ±3%.

AO2

Analog output, programmable. Default² = current. 0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm).

Accuracy ±3%.

AGND

Analog output circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).

+24V

Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC / 250 mA (reference to GND), short circuit

protected.

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as floating).

DCOM

Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there must be  10 V

(or  -10 V) between that input and DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the

ACS550 (X1-10) or by an external 12…24 V source of either polarity.

DI1

Digital input 1, programmable. Default² = start/stop.

DI2

Digital input 2, programmable. Default² = fwd/rev.

DI3

Digital input 3, programmable. Default² = constant speed sel (code).

DI4

Digital input 4, programmable. Default² = constant speed sel (code).

DI5

Digital input 5, programmable. Default² = ramp pair selection (code).

DI6

Digital input 6, programmable. Default² = not used.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Hardware description

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable. Default² = Ready

Maximum: 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A

RO1A

Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)

RO1B

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable. Default² = Running

Maximum: 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A

RO2A

Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)

RO2B

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable. Default² = Fault (-1)

Maximum: 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A

RO3A

Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)

RO3B

¹ Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.

² Default values depend on the macro used. Values specified are for the default macro. See chapter

Application macros on page 77.

Note: Terminals 3, 6 and 9 are at the same potential.

Note: For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when the ACS550 is

powered down.

WARNING! All ELV (Extra Low Voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used

within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e. within a zone where all simultaneously

accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages

appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding.

The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to

the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in

EN 50178, provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil

the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft).

You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.

PNP connection (source)

NPN connection (sink)

+24V

GND

DCOM

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Check the insulation of the assembly

Drive

Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the

drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation

between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltage-

limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.

Supply cable

Check the insulation of the supply (input) cable according to local regulations before

connecting to the drive.

Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:

1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and disconnected from the

drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.

2. Measure the insulation resistance between phase

conductors and between each phase conductor and

the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring

ohm

voltage of 1000 V DC. The insulation resistance of an

W1 PE

ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value

at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of

other motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Moisture inside

the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry

the motor and repeat the measurement.

Install the wiring

Wiring IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure with cables

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland

box. (See section Conduit/Gland kit on page 23.)

2. Install the cable clamps for the power/motor cables.

X0004

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back far

enough to route individual wires.

On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far

enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the

shield can be twisted into a bundle (pig-tail). Keep the

bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize

noise radiation.

IP2001

360° grounding under the clamp is recommended for

the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In this

Frame

Tightening torque

case, remove the sheathing at the cable clamp.

size

N·m

lb·ft

R1, R2

1.4

Route both cables through the clamps.

2.5

1.8

Strip and connect the power/motor wires and the

5.6; PE: 2

4; PE 1.5

power ground wire to the drive terminals. See the

table on the right for tightening torques.

40; PE: 8

30; PE: 6

Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power

terminal considerations - R6 frame size on page 287.

Connect the bundle (pig-tail) created from the motor

cable shield to the GND terminal.

X0005

Install conduit/gland box and tighten the cable clamps.

Install the cable clamp(s) for the control cable(s).

(Power/motor cables and clamps not shown in the

figure.)

X0006

10.

Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper

shield into a bundle (pig-tail).

11.

Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and tighten

clamp(s).

12.

Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital and

analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at the drive end.)

13.

Strip and connect the individual control wires to the

drive terminals. See section Control terminals table

on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m

(0.3 lb·ft).

14.

Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).

IP2003

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Wiring IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure with conduit

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland

box. (See section Conduit/Gland kit on page 23.)

2. Install thin-wall conduit clamps (not supplied).

X0007

3. Install conduit/gland box.

4. Connect conduit runs to box.

X0005

Route input power and motor wiring through

conduits (must be separate conduit runs).

Strip wires.

Connect power, motor and ground wires to the drive

terminals. See the table on the right for tightening

torques.

IP2004

Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power

Frame

Tightening torque

terminal considerations - R6 frame size on page

size

N·m

lb·ft

287.

R1, R2

1.4

2.5

1.8

5.6; PE: 2

4; PE 1.5

40; PE: 8

30; PE: 6

Route the control cable through the conduit (must be

separate from input power and motor conduit runs).

Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper

shield into a bundle (pig-tail).

10.

Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital

and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at the

drive end.)

11.

Strip and connect the individual control wires to the

drive terminals. See section Control terminals table

on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m

(0.3 lb·ft).

12.

Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).

IP2005

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Wiring IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure with cables

Cut the cable seals as needed for the power, motor

and control cables. The cable seals are cone-

shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the drive.

The conical part of the seals must face downwards

when the seals are inserted in the lead-through

plate holes.

IP5003

On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back

far enough to route individual wires.

On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far

enough to expose the copper wire shield so that

the shield can be twisted into a bundle (pig-tail).

Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width

to minimize noise radiation.

360° grounding under the clamp is recommended

IP5004

for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In

this case, remove the sheathing at the cable

clamp.

Frame

Tightening torque

size

N·m

lb·ft

Route both cables through the clamps and tighten

R1, R2

1.4

the clamps.

2.5

1.8

Strip and connect the power/motor wires and the

5.6; PE: 2

4; PE 1.5

power ground wire to the drive terminals. See the

40; PE: 8

30; PE: 6

table on the right for tightening torques.

Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal considerations - R6 frame

size on page 287.

Connect the bundle (pig-tail) created from the

motor cable shield to the GND terminal.

Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper

shield into a bundle (pig-tail).

Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and

9, 10

tighten clamp(s).

Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for

digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only

at the drive end.)

10.

Strip and connect the individual control wires to the

drive terminals. See section Control terminals table

on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m

(0.3 lb·ft).

IP5005

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Wiring IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure with conduit

1. Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit

will be installed. (The cable seals are cone-shaped,

rubber seals on the bottom of the drive.)

IP5013

2. For each conduit run, install water tight conduit

connectors (not supplied).

IP5016

3. Route the power wiring through the conduit.

4. Route the motor wiring through the conduit.

5. Strip the wires.

6. Connect the power, motor and ground wires to the

drive terminals. See the table on the right for

tightening torques.

IP5007

Frame

Tightening torque

Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power

sizeN·m

lb·ft

terminal considerations - R6 frame size on page

R1, R2

1.4

287.

2.5

1.8

5.6; PE: 2

4; PE 1.5

7. Route the control cable through the conduit.

40; PE: 8

30; PE: 6

8. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the

copper shield into a bundle (pig-tail).

9. Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1.

(Ground only at the drive end.)

10. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals. See section

Control terminals table on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m (0.3 lb·ft).

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Check installation

Before applying power, perform the following checks.

Check

Installation environment conforms to the drive’s specifications for ambient conditions.

The drive is mounted securely.

Space around the drive meets the drive’s specifications for cooling.

The motor and driven equipment are ready for start.

For IT systems and corner-grounded TN systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected (see

section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27).

The drive is properly grounded.

The input power (mains) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.

The input power (mains) connections at U1, V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as

specified.

The input power (mains) fuses are installed.

The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified.

The motor cable is routed away from other cables.

NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable.

The control connections are connected and tightened as specified.

NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are inside the drive.

NO alternate power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected - no

voltage is applied to the output of the drive.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Reinstall the cover

IP21 / UL type 1

1. Align the cover and slide it on.

2. Tighten the captive screw.

3. Reinstall the control panel.

4. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up,

control with I/O and ID Run on

page 37.

IP2009

IP54 / UL type 12

R1…R5

1. Align the cover and slide it on.

2. Tighten the captive screws around

the edge of the cover.

3. Slide the hood down over the top

of the cover. (Only needed for UL

type 12 installations.)

4. Install the two screws that attach

the hood. (Only needed for UL

type 12 installations.)

5. Install the control panel.

Note: The control panel window

must be closed to comply with

IP54 / UL type 12.

6. Optional: Add a lock (not supplied) to secure the control panel window.

7. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run on page

37.

Installation

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

The chapter instructs how to:

• perform the start-up

• start, stop, change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor

through the I/O interface

• perform an Identification Run for the drive.

Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For

details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels starting on

page 47.

How to start up the drive

How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have.

• If you have an Assistant Control Panel, you can either run the Start-up

Assistant (see section How to perform the guided start-up on page 42) or perform

a limited start-up (see section How to perform the limited start-up on page 37).

The Start-up Assistant, which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only,

guides you through all essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the

drive gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the

instructions given in the manual.

• If you have a Basic Control Panel, follow the instructions given in section How

to perform the limited start-up on page 37.

How to perform the limited start-up

For the limited start-up, you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control

Panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays

shown are the Basic Control Panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the

Assistant Control Panel only.

Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.

SAFETY

The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during

the start-up procedure.

The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.

Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation, page 35.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.

De-couple the driven machine if:

• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or

• an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in

applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.

POWER-UP

Apply input power.

REM

The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode.

OUTPUT

FWD

The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start-

REM

CHOICE

EXIT

Do you want to

up Assistant. If you press

, the Start-up Assistant is not

use the start-up

assistant?

run, and you can continue with manual start-up in a similar

Yes

manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel.

EXIT

00:00

MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (Group 99: START-UP DATA)

If you have an Assistant Control Panel, select the language

REM

PAR EDIT

(the Basic Control Panel does not support languages). See

9901 LANGUAGE

parameter 9901 for the values of the available language

ENGLISH

[0]

alternatives. You find parameter descriptions in section

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Complete parameter descriptions starting on page 106.

The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic

Control Panel. You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel

on page 73. Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 55.

The general parameter setting procedure:

REM

1. To go to the Main menu, press

if the bottom line shows OUTPUT;

rEF

FWD

otherwise press

repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.

2. Press keys

until you see “PAr” and press

REM

-01-

PAR

FWD

3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys

and press

REM

2001

PAR

FWD

4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys

REM

2002

PAR

FWD

5. Press and hold

for about two seconds until the parameter value is

REM

shown with

SET

under the value.

1500

rpm

PAR

SET

FWD

6. Change the value with keys

. The value changes faster while

REM

you keep the key pressed down.

1600

rpm

PAR

SET

FWD

7. Save the parameter value by pressing

REM

2002

PAR

FWD

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Select the application macro (parameter 9902). The general

REM

parameter setting procedure is given above.

9902

PAR

FWD

The default value 1 (ABB STANDARD) is suitable in most cases.

Select the motor control mode (parameter 9904).

REM

(VECTOR:SPEED) is suitable in most cases. 2 (VECTOR:TORQ) is suitable for

9904

PAR

FWD

torque control applications. 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) is recommended

• for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the

drive is variable

• when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20% of the nominal

current of the drive

• when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.

Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:

Note: Set the motor data to

exactly the same value as on

the motor nameplate. For

ABB Motors

example, if the motor nominal

motor

M2AA 200 MLA 4

speed is 1470 rpm on the

IEC 200 M/L 55

nameplate, setting the value of

Ins.cl. F

IP 55

parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM

r/min

cos

IA/IN

E/s

SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the

690 Y

1475

32.5

0.83

400 D

1475

0.83

wrong operation of the drive.

660 Y

1470

0.83

380 V

380 D

1470

0.83

supply

415 D

1475

0.83

voltage

440 D

1770

0.83

Cat. no

3GAA 202 001 - ADA

6312/C3

6210/C3

180

IEC 34-1

•

motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905)

REM

9905

PAR

FWD

•

motor nominal current (parameter 9906)

REM

9906

Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I_2hd A

PAR

FWD

•

motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907)

REM

9907

PAR

FWD

•

motor nominal speed (parameter 9908)

REM

9908

PAR

FWD

•

motor nominal power (parameter 9909)

REM

9909

PAR

FWD

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Select the motor identification method (parameter 9910).

The default value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) using the identification magnetization is suitable for most

applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. Note however that this requires

that:

• parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or

• parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR FLYST)

or 5 (FLY + BOOST).

If your selection is 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), move to the next step.

Value 1 (ON), which performs a separate ID Run, should be selected if:

• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)],

and/or

• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or

• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and

without any measured speed feedback is required.

If you decide to do the ID Run [value 1 (ON)], continue by following the separate instructions

given on page 45 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION

OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 40.

IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 (OFF/IDMAGN)

As stated above, the identification magnetization is performed only if:

• parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or

• parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR FLYST)

or 5 (FLY + BOOST).

LOC

Press key

REM

to switch to local control (LOC shown on the left).

Press

to start the drive. The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor

for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating).

DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION

Check the direction of the motor rotation.

• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left),

LOC

REM

• To go to the Main menu, press

if the bottom line shows

SET

FWD

OUTPUT; otherwise press

repeatedly until you see

MENU at the bottom.

• Press keys

until you see “rEF” and press

• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value

with key

• Press

to start the motor.

• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as

indicated on the display (FWD means forward and REV

reverse).

• Press

to stop the motor.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

To change the direction of the motor rotation:

forward

• Disconnect input power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes

direction

for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure

the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1)

and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is

reverse

discharged.

direction

• Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors

at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.

• Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the

check as described above.

SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES

Set the minimum speed (parameter 2001).

LOC

2001

PAR

FWD

Set the maximum speed (parameter 2002).

LOC

2002

PAR

FWD

Set the acceleration time 1 (parameter 2202).

LOC

2202

Note: Check also acceleration time 2 (parameter 2205) if two

PAR

FWD

acceleration times will be used in the application.

Set the deceleration time 1 (parameter 2203).

LOC

2203

Note: Set also deceleration time 2 (parameter 2206) if two

PAR

FWD

deceleration times will be used in the application.

SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK

The start-up is now completed. However, it might be useful at

LOC

this stage to set the parameters required by your application

9902

PAR

FWD

and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in

section User parameter sets on page 88.

Check that the drive state is OK.

Basic Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or alarms

shown on the display. If you want to check the LEDs on the

front of the drive, switch first to remote control (otherwise a

fault is generated) before removing the panel and verifying that

the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.

Assistant Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or

alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green

and does not blink.

The drive is now ready for use.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to perform the guided start-up

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the Assistant Control Panel.

Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.

SAFETY

The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during

the start-up procedure.

The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.

Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation, page 35.

Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.

De-couple the driven machine if:

• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or

• an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in

applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.

POWER-UP

Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you want to use

REM CHOICE

Do you want to

the Start-up Assistant.

use the start-up

assistant?

• Press

(when

Yes

is highlighted) to run the Start-up

Yes

Assistant.

EXIT

00:00

EXIT

• Press

if you do not want to run the Start-up Assistant.

• Press key

to highlight

and then press

if you want to

REM CHOICE

Show start-up

make the panel ask (or not ask) the question about running the

assistant on

next boot?

Start-up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to

Yes

the drive.

EXIT

00:00

SELECTING THE LANGUAGE

If you decided to run the Start-up Assistant, the display then asks

REM

PAR EDIT

you to select the language. Scroll to the desired language with

9901 LANGUAGE

SAVE

keys

and press

to accept.

ENGLISH

EXIT

[0]

If you press

, the Start-up Assistant is stopped.

EXIT

00:00

SAVE

STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP

The Start-up Assistant now guides you through the set-up tasks,

REM

PAR EDIT

starting with the motor set-up. Set the motor data to exactly the

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

same value as on the motor nameplate.

220 V

Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys

and

EXIT

00:00

SAVE

press

to accept and continue with the Start-up Assistant.

EXIT

Note: At any time, if you press

, the Start-up Assistant is

stopped and the display goes to the Output mode.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

After completing a set-up task, the Start-up Assistant suggests the

REM CHOICE

Do you want to

next one.

continue with

application setup?

• Press

(when

Continue

is highlighted) to continue with the

Continue

Skip

suggested task.

EXIT

00:00

• Press key

to highlight

Skip

and then press

to move to

the following task without doing the suggested task.

EXIT

• Press

to stop the Start-up Assistant.

SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK

The start-up is now completed. However, it might be useful at this

stage to set the parameters required by your application and save

the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User

parameter sets on page 88.

After the whole set-up is completed, check there are no faults or

alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does

not blink.

The drive is now ready for use.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog

inputs when:

• the motor start-up is performed, and

• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.

Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example.

PRELIMINARY SETTINGS

If you need to change the direction of rotation, check that parameter

1003 is set to 3 (REQUEST).

Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the

See section ABB Standard

macro on page 78.

connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro.

Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key

to switch

In remote control, the panel

LOC

REM

display shows text REM.

between remote and local control.

STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on.

REM

Assistant Control Panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is dotted until the

OUTPUT

FWD

setpoint is reached.

Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the

setpoint is reached

Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by adjusting the

REM

voltage of analog input AI1.

OUTPUT

FWD

CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR

Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.

REM

OUTPUT

REV

Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.

REM

OUTPUT

FWD

STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops.

REM

Assistant Control Panel: The arrow stops rotating.

OUTPUT

FWD

Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to perform the ID Run

The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification

magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor

parameter (Group 99: START-UP DATA) is changed. This is valid when parameter

9910 ID RUN has value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), and

• parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or

• parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or

(FLY + BOOST).

In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run [9910 ID RUN =

(ON)]. The ID Run should be selected if:

• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or

(VECTOR:TORQ)], and/or

• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or

• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed

range and without any measured speed feedback is required.

Note: If motor parameters (Group 99: START-UP DATA) are changed after the ID

Run, it must be repeated.

ID Run procedure

The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here. For Assistant Control

Panel see page 55 and for Basic Control Panel page 73 in chapter Control panels.

PRE-CHECK

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal speed

during the ID Run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Ensure that it is

safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run!

De-couple the motor from the driven equipment.

Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905…9909 are equivalent to those on

the motor nameplate, as shown in the steps on page 39.

If parameter values (Group 01: OPERATING DATA to Group 98: OPTIONS) are changed

before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:

2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of the motor rated speed

2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT > I_2hd

2017 MAX TORQUE 1 > 50% or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 > 50%, depending on which limit is in

use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.

Check that the Run Enable signal is on (parameter 1601).

LOC

Ensure that the panel is in local control (LOC shown on the left / at the top). Press key

REM

switch between local and remote control.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save the new setting

LOC

PAR EDIT

SAVE

by pressing

9910 ID RUN

[1]

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to

LOC

50.0Hz

EXIT

the Output mode by pressing

repeatedly until you get

0.0 Hz

there.

0.0 A

0.0 %

DIR

00:00

Press

to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching

LOC ALARM

between the display that was shown when you started the ID

ALARM 2019

Run and the alarm display presented on the right.

ID run

In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel

00:00

keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at

any time by pressing

After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown

LOC FAULT

any more.

FAULT 11

If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is

ID RUN FAIL

shown.

00:00

ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save the new setting

LOC

by pressing

9910

PAR

FWD

LOC

PAR

SET

FWD

If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to

LOC

the Output mode by pressing

repeatedly until you get

OUTPUT

FWD

there.

Press

to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching

LOC

between the display that was shown when you started the ID

A2019

FWD

Run and the alarm display presented on the right.

In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel

keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at

any time by pressing

After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown

LOC

any more.

F0011

FWD

If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is

shown.

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Control panels

About control panels

Use a control panel to control the drive, read status data and adjust parameters. The

drive works with either of two different control panel types:

• Basic Control Panel - This panel (described in section Basic Control Panel on

page 68) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.

• Assistant Control Panel - This panel (described below) includes pre-programmed

assistants to automate the most common parameter setups. The panel provides

language support. It is available with different language sets.

Compatibility

The manual is compatible with the following panel versions:

• Basic Control Panel: ACS-CP-C Rev. M or later

• Assistant Control Panel (Area 1): ACS-CP-A Rev. F or later

(new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX,

where year YY = 07 or greater and revision R = F, G, E, …)

• Assistant Control Panel (Asia): ACS-CP-D Rev. Q or later

See page 51 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel. See

parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant

Control Panels.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Assistant Control Panel

Features

The Assistant Control Panel features:

• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display

• language selection for the display

• Start-up Assistant to ease drive commissioning

• copy function - parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later

transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.

• context sensitive help

• real time clock.

Overview

The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant

Control Panel.

No.

Use

Status LED - Green for normal operation. If LED is flashing, or red, see

section Diagnostic displays on page 259.

LOC

49.1Hz

LCD display - Divided into three main areas:

49.1 Hz

a. Status line - variable, depending on the mode of operation, see section

0.5 A

Status line on page 49.

10.7 %

b. Center - variable; in general, shows signal and parameter values, menus or

DIR

00:00

lists. Shows also faults and alarms.

c. Bottom line - shows current functions of the two soft keys and, if enabled,

the clock display.

Soft key 1 - Function depends on the context. The text in the lower left corner

of the LCD display indicates the function.

Soft key 2 - Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right

corner of the LCD display indicates the function.

Up -

• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.

• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.

• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.

Holding the key down changes the value faster.

Down -

• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD

display.

• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.

• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.

Holding the key down changes the value faster.

LOC/REM - Changes between local and remote control of the drive.

Help - Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The

information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of

the display.

STOP - Stops the drive in local control.

START - Starts the drive in local control.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Status line

The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.

LOC

49.1Hz

LOC MAIN MENU

No.

Field

Alternatives

Significance

Control location

LOC

Drive control is local, that is, from the control

panel.

REM

Drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or

fieldbus.

State

Forward shaft direction

Reverse shaft direction

Rotating arrow

Drive is running at setpoint.

Dotted rotating arrow

Drive is running but not at setpoint.

Stationary arrow

Drive is stopped.

Dotted stationary arrow

Start command is present, but the motor is not

running, e.g. because start enable is missing.

Panel operation

• Name of the current mode

mode

• Name of the list or menu shown

• Name of the operation state, e.g. PAR EDIT.

Reference value

• Reference value in the Output mode

or number of the

• Number of the highlighted item, e.g mode,

selected item

parameter group or fault.

Operation

You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-

sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the

display above each key.

You select an option, e.g. operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the

and

arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing

the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an

option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes

and return to the previous operation level.

The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes: Output, Parameters, Assistants,

Changed Parameters, Fault Logger, Time and Date, Parameter Backup, I/O Settings

and Fault. The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a

fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the

fault or alarm. You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter

Diagnostics).

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can

LOC

49.1Hz

start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and

49.1 Hz

remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up

0.5 A

to three actual values. To do other tasks, go first to the

10.7 %

Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu.

DIR

00:00

The status line (see section Status line on page 49) shows

LOC MAIN MENU

the name of the current menu, mode, item or state.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and

the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.

Task

Mode

Page

How to get help

Any

How to find out the panel version

At power up

How to adjust the display contrast

Output

How to switch between local and remote control

Any

How to start and stop the drive

Any

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

Output

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Output

How to change the value of a parameter

Parameters

How to select the monitored signals

Parameters

How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets)

Assistants

with assistants

How to view and edit changed parameters

Changed Parameters

How to view faults

Fault Logger

How to reset faults and alarms

Output, Fault

265

How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the

Time and Date

clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to

the daylight saving changes

How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel

Parameter Backup

How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive

Parameter Backup

How to view backup information

Parameter Backup

How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

I/O Settings

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to get help

Step

Action

Display

Press

to read the context-sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted.

LOC

PAR GROUPS

01 OPERATING DATA

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

04 FAULT HISTORY

10 START/STOP/DIR

11 REFERENCE SELECT

EXIT

00:00

SEL

LOC HELP

If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display.

This group defines

external sources

(EXT1 and EXT2) for

commands that enable

start, stop and

EXIT

00:00

If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys

and

LOC HELP

external sources

(EXT1 and EXT2) for

commands that enable

start, stop and

direction changes.

EXIT

00:00

EXIT

After reading the text, return to the previous display by pressing

LOC

PAR GROUPS

01 OPERATING DATA

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

04 FAULT HISTORY

10 START/STOP/DIR

11 REFERENCE SELECT

EXIT

00:00

SEL

How to find out the panel version

Step

Action

Display

If the power is switched on, switch it off.

Keep key

pressed down while you switch on the power and read the

PANEL VERSION INFO

Panel FW:

x.xx

information. The display shows the following panel information:

ROM CRC: xxxxxxxxxx

Flash Rev:

x.xx

Panel FW: panel firmware version

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum

Flash Rev: flash content version

Flash content comment.

When you release the

key, the panel goes to the Output mode.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control

You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be

able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.

Step

Action

Display

• To switch between remote control (REM shown on the status line) and local

LOC MESSAGE

LOC

Switching to the

control (LOC shown on the status line), press

REM

local control mode.

Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL

LOCK.

00:00

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and

controlled through the drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and

LOC

control the drive using the control panel, press

. The result depends on

REM

how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display flashes “Switching to the local

control mode”), the drive stops. Set the local control reference as instructed

on page 54.

• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive continues as before.

The drive copies the current remote values for the run/stop status and the

reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.

The arrow ( or

) on the

• To stop the drive in local control, press

status line stops rotating.

The arrow ( or

) on the

• To start the drive in local control, press

status line starts rotating. It

is dotted until the drive

reaches the setpoint.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Output mode

In the Output mode, you can:

• monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01: OPERATING DATA

• change the direction of the motor rotation

• set the speed, frequency or torque reference

• adjust the display contrast

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

EXIT

You get to the Output mode by pressing

repeatedly.

The top right corner of the

LOC

49.1Hz

LOC

5.0Hz

display shows the reference

50%

49.1 Hz

value. The center can be

0.5 A

0.4 A

configured to show up to three

10.7 %

24.4 %

signal values or bar graphs. If

DIR

00:00

DIR

00:00

just one or two signals are

selected for display, the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in

addition to the value or bar graph. See page 56 for instructions on selecting and

modifying the monitored signals.

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

Step

Action

Display

EXIT

If you are not in the Output mode, press

repeatedly until you get there.

REM

49.1Hz

49.1 Hz

0.5 A

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local

LOC

49.1Hz

LOC

control by pressing

REM

. The display briefly shows a message about changing

49.1 Hz

the mode and then returns to the Output mode.

0.5 A

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

To change the direction from forward ( shown on the status line) to reverse (

LOC

49.1Hz

DIR

shown on the status line), or vice versa, press

49.1 Hz

0.5 A

10.7 %

Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 (REQUEST).

DIR

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Step

Action

Display

EXIT

If you are not in the Output mode, press

repeatedly until you get there.

REM

49.1Hz

49.1 Hz

0.5 A

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local

LOC

49.1Hz

LOC

control by pressing

REM

. The display briefly shows a message about changing

49.1 Hz

the mode and then returns to the Output mode.

0.5 A

Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

modification in remote control.

• To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the

LOC

50.0Hz

display, press

. The value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive

50.0 Hz

permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch-off.

0.5 A

• To decrease the value, press

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

How to adjust the display contrast

Step

Action

Display

EXIT

If you are not in the Output mode, press

repeatedly until you get there.

LOC

49.1Hz

49.1 Hz

0.5 A

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

• To increase the contrast, press keys

and

simultaneously.

LOC

49.1Hz

49.1 Hz

• To decrease the contrast, press keys

and

simultaneously.

0.5 A

10.7 %

DIR

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Parameters mode

In the Parameters mode, you can:

• view and change parameter values

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to select a parameter and change its value

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys

LOC PAR GROUPS

ENTER

01 OPERATING DATA

and

, and pressing

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

04 FAULT HISTORY

10 START/STOP/DIR

11 REFERENCE SELECT

EXIT

00:00

SEL

Select the appropriate parameter group with keys

and

LOC PAR GROUPS

99 START-UP DATA

01 OPERATING DATA

03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

04 FAULT HISTORY

10 START/STOP/DIR

EXIT

00:00

SEL

LOC

PARAMETERS

Press

9901 LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

9902 APPLIC MACRO

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

EXIT

00:00

EDIT

Select the appropriate parameter with keys

and

. The current

LOC

PARAMETERS

9901 LANGUAGE

value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter.

9902 APPLIC MACRO

ABB STANDARD

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

EXIT

00:00

EDIT

LOC

PAR EDIT

Press

9902 APPLIC MACRO

ABB STANDARD

[1]

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Specify a new value for the parameter with keys

and

LOC

PAR EDIT

Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key

9902 APPLIC MACRO

down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the

3-WIRE

[2]

displayed value with the default value.

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

• To save the new value, press

LOC

PARAMETERS

9901 LANGUAGE

CANCEL

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

9902 APPLIC MACRO

3-WIRE

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

EXIT

00:00

EDIT

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to select the monitored signals

Step

Action

Display

You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they

LOC

PAR EDIT

are displayed with Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 55 for

3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM

detailed instructions on changing parameter values.

OUTPUT FREQ

[103]

By default, the display shows three signals. The particular default signals

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO: For macros whose

default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the

LOC

PAR EDIT

default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED, otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. The defaults

3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM

for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE, respectively.

CURRENT

[104]

To change the default signals, select up to three signals from Group 01:

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

OPERATING DATA to be shown.

LOC

PAR EDIT

Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of

the signal parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA (= number of the

3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM

parameter without the leading zero), e.g. 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE.

TORQUE

[105]

Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 (3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).

Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a decimal number or a bar

LOC

PAR EDIT

graph. For decimal numbers, you can specify the decimal point location, or use

3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM

the decimal point location and unit of the source signal [setting (9 (DIRECT)]. For

DIRECT

details, see parameter 3404.

[9]

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM

Signal 2: parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM

Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.

Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if parameter

LOC

PAR EDIT

3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405.

3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT

Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT

[3]

Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.

Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum

LOC

PAR EDIT

display values. This has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9

3406 OUTPUT1 MIN

(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407.

0.0 Hz

Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX

Signal 3: parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX.

LOC

PAR EDIT

3407 OUTPUT1 MAX

500.0 Hz

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Assistants mode

When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up Assistant guides you through the

setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up Assistant is divided into assistants, each

of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set, for

example Motor Set-up or PID Control. You can activate the assistants one after the

other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The tasks of the

assistants are listed in the table on page 58.

In the Assistants mode, you can:

• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to use an assistant

The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through

assistants. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used as an example.

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys

LOC ASSISTANTS

ENTER

Start-up assistant

and

, and pressing

Motor Set-up

Application

Speed control EXT1

Speed control EXT2

EXIT

00:00

SEL

Select the assistant with keys

and

, and press

LOC

PAR EDIT

If you select any other assistant than the Start-up Assistant, it guides you

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5.

220 V

below. After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit

the Assistants mode. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used here as an example.

EXIT

00:00

SAVE

LOC CHOICE

If you select the Start-up Assistant, it activates the first assistant, which guides

Do you want to

you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4.

continue with

application setup?

and 5. below. The Start-up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the

Continue

next assistant or skip it - select the appropriate answer with keys

and

Skip

SEL

EXIT

00:00

, and press

. If you choose to skip, the Start-up Assistant asks the

same question about the next assistant, and so on.

• To specify a new value, press keys

and

LOC

PAR EDIT

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

240 V

EXIT

00:00

SAVE

LOC HELP

• To ask for information on the requested parameter, press key

. Scroll the

EXIT

Set as given on the

help text with keys

and

. Close the help by pressing

motor nameplate.

Voltage value must

correspond to motor

D/Y connection.

EXIT

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Step

Action

Display

• To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter,

LOC

PAR EDIT

SAVE

press

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR

EXIT

• To stop the assistant, press

1.2 A

EXIT

00:00

SAVE

The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters.

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC

MACRO), the Start-up Assistant decides, which consequent tasks it suggests.

Name

Description

Set parameters

Language select

Selecting the language

9901

Motor set-up

Setting the motor data

9904…9909

Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in

9910

the allowed range: Setting the limits.)

Application

Selecting the application macro

9902, parameters associated to

the macro

Option modules

Activating the option modules

Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

Group 52: PANEL COMM

9802

Speed control

Selecting the source for the speed reference

1103

EXT1

(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion)

(1301…1303, 3001)

Setting the reference limits

1104, 1105

Setting the speed (frequency) limits

2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)

Setting the acceleration and deceleration times

2202, 2203

Speed control

Selecting the source for the speed reference

1106

EXT2

(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion)

(1301…1303, 3001)

Setting the reference limits

1107, 1108

Torque control

Selecting the source for the torque reference

1106

(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion)

(1301…1303, 3001)

Setting the reference limits

1107, 1108

Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times

2401, 2402

PID control

Selecting the source for the process reference

1106

(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion)

(1301…1303, 3001)

Setting the reference limits

1107, 1108

Setting the speed (reference) limits

2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)

Setting the source and limits for the process actual value

4016, 4018, 4019

Start/Stop control

Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external

1001, 1002

control locations, EXT1 and EXT2

Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2

1102

Defining the direction control

1003

Defining the start and stop modes

2101…2103

Selecting the use of Run Enable signal

1601

Timed functions

Setting the timed functions

Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS

Selecting the timed start/stop control for external control locations

1001, 1002

EXT1 and EXT2

Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control

1102

Activation of timed constant speed 1

1201

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Changed Parameters mode

In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:

• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default

values

• change these parameters

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view and edit changed parameters

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the

LOC

CHANGED PAR

ENTER

1202 CONST SPEED 1

menu with keys

and

, and pressing

10.0 Hz

1203 CONST SPEED 2

1204 CONST SPEED 3

9902 APPLIC MACRO

EXIT

00:00

EDIT

Select the changed parameter on the list with keys

and

. The

LOC

PAR EDIT

EDIT

value of the selected parameter is shown below it. Press

to modify the

1202 CONST SPEED 1

value.

10.0 Hz

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Specify a new value for the parameter with keys

and

LOC

PAR EDIT

Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key

1202 CONST SPEED 1

down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the

15.0 Hz

displayed value with the default value.

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

• To accept the new value, press

. If the new value is the default value, the

LOC

CHANGED PAR

1202 CONST SPEED 1

parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters.

15.0 Hz

CANCEL

1203 CONST SPEED 2

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

1204 CONST SPEED 3

9902 APPLIC MACRO

EXIT

00:00

EDIT

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Fault Logger mode

In the Fault Logger mode, you can:

• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three

latest faults are kept in the memory)

• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the

most recent fault is kept in the memory)

• read the help text for the fault

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to view faults

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with

LOC

FAULT LOGGER

ENTER

10: PANEL LOSS

keys

and

, and pressing

. The display shows the fault log

19.03.05 13:04:57

starting with the latest fault.

6: DC UNDERVOLT

6: AI1 LOSS

The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and

EXIT

00:00

DETAIL

corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics.

To see the details of a fault, select it with keys

and

, and press

LOC

PANEL LOSS

DETAIL

FAULT

FAULT TIME 1

13:04:57

FAULT TIME 2

EXIT

00:00

DIAG

To show the help text, press

. Scroll the help text with keys

and

LOC DIAGNOSTICS

Check: Comm lines

and connections,

parameter 3002,

After reading the help, press

to return to the previous display.

parameters in groups

10 and 11.

EXIT

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Time and Date mode

In the Time and Date mode, you can:

• show or hide the clock

• change date and time display formats

• set the date and time

• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving

changes

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock

when the panel is not powered by the drive.

How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time and enable

or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME & DATE on the menu with

LOC TIME & DATE

ENTER

CLOCK VISIBILITY

keys

and

, and pressing

TIME FORMAT

DATE FORMAT

SET TIME

SET DATE

EXIT

00:00

SEL

• To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu, press

LOC CLOCK VISIB

SEL

Show clock

, select Show clock (Hide clock) and press

, or, if you want to return

Hide clock

EXIT

to the previous display without making changes, press

EXIT

00:00

SEL

LOC DATE FORMAT

• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on the menu, press

CANCEL

dd.mm.yy

and select a suitable format. Press

to save or

to cancel your

mm/dd/yy

dd.mm.yyyy

changes.

mm/dd/yyyy

CANCEL

00:00

SEL

LOC TIME FORMAT

• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on the menu, press

24-hour

CANCEL

and select a suitable format. Press

to save or

to cancel your

12-hour

changes.

CANCEL

00:00

SEL

LOC

SET TIME

• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and press

. Specify the

hours with keys

and

, and press

.Then specify the minutes.

CANCEL

Press

to save or

to cancel your changes.

15:41

CANCEL

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Step

Action

Display

SEL

LOC

SET DATE

• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and press

. Specify the

first part of the date (day or month depending on the selected date format) with

keys

and

, and press

. Repeat for the second part. After

19.03.05

CANCEL

specifying the year, press

. To cancel your changes, press

CANCEL

00:00

LOC DAYLIGHT SAV

• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight

SEL

Off

saving changes, select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press

Pressing

opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the

Australia1:NSW,Vict..

Australia2:Tasmania..

period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area

EXIT

00:00

SEL

whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed.

LOC HELP

• To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving

EU:

SEL

On: Mar last Sunday

changes, select Off and press

Off: Oct last Sunday

• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the country or area whose

US:

SEL

daylight saving changes are followed and press

EXIT

00:00

EXIT

• To return to the previous display without making changes, press

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Parameter Backup mode

The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another

or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive

parameters, including up to two user sets, to the Assistant Control Panel. The full

set, partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from

the control panel to another drive or the same drive. Uploading and downloading can

be performed in local control.

The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.

In the Parameter Backup mode, you can:

•

copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).

This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by

the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.

•

view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD

TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes e.g. the type and rating of the drive

where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are

going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to

ensure that the drives match.

•

restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD

FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable

motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.

Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer

parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.

•

copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive

(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal

motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group

51: EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.

The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.

•

copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD

USER SET1). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and

the internal motor parameters.

The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved

using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User parameter sets on page

88) and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.

•

copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD

USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.

•

start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has

to be in local control for uploading and downloading.

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu. - If REM is shown

PARAMETERS

LOC

on the status line, press

REM

to switch to local control.

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys

LOC PAR BACKUP

ENTER

UPLOAD TO PANEL

and

, and pressing

BACKUP INFO

DOWNLOAD FULL SET

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION

DOWNLOAD USER SET1

EXIT

00:00

SEL

• To copy all parameters (including user sets and internal parameters) from the

LOC PAR BACKUP

drive to the control panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup

Copying parameters

SEL

50%

menu with keys

and

, and press

. During the transfer, the

ABORT

display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion. Press

you want to stop the operation.

ABORT

00:00

LOC MESSAGE

After the upload is completed, the display shows a message about the

Parameter upload

completion. Press

to return to the Par Backup menu.

successful.

00:00

LOC PAR BACKUP

• To perform downloads, select the appropriate operation (here DOWNLOAD

Downloading

FULL SET is used as an example) on the Par Backup menu with keys

parameters (full

SEL

and

, and press

. The display shows the transfer status as a

set)

ABORT

50%

percentage of completion. Press

if you want stop the operation.

ABORT

00:00

LOC MESSAGE

After the download is completed, the display shows a message about the

Parameter download

completion. Press

to return to the Par Backup menu.

successfully

completed.

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to view information about the backup

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys

LOC PAR BACKUP

ENTER

UPLOAD TO PANEL

and

, and pressing

BACKUP INFO

DOWNLOAD FULL SET

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION

DOWNLOAD USER SET1

EXIT

00:00

SEL

Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys

and

LOC BACKUP INFO

SEL

DRIVE TYPE

and press

. The display shows the following information about the drive

ACS550

where the backup was made:

3304 DRIVE RATING

4A62i

DRIVE TYPE:

type of the drive

3301 FIRMWARE

EXIT

00:00

DRIVE RATING:

rating of the drive in format XXXYZ, where

XXX: nominal current rating. If present, an “A” indicates

LOC BACKUP INFO

ACS550

a decimal point, e.g. 4A6 means 4.6 A.

3304 DRIVE RATING

2 = 200 V

4A62i

4 = 400 V

3301 FIRMWARE

300F hex

6 = 600 V

EXIT

00:00

= European loading package

n = US loading package

FIRMWARE:

firmware version of the drive.

You can scroll the information with keys

and

EXIT

LOC PAR BACKUP

Press

to return to the Par Backup menu.

UPLOAD TO PANEL

BACKUP INFO

DOWNLOAD FULL SET

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION

DOWNLOAD USER SET1

EXIT

00:00

SEL

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

I/O Settings mode

In the I/O Settings mode, you can:

• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal

• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1

(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can

change its value to e.g. AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106

REF2 SELECT to AI1.

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode, otherwise

LOC MAIN MENU

EXIT

by pressing

repeatedly until you get to the Main menu.

PARAMETERS

ASSISTANTS

CHANGED PAR

EXIT

00:00

ENTER

Go the I/O Settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS on the menu with keys

LOC I/O SETTINGS

ENTER

DIGITAL INPUTS (DI)

and

, and pressing

ANALOG INPUTS

(AI)

RELAY OUTPUTS

(ROUT)

ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT)

PANEL

EXIT

00:00

SEL

Select the I/O group, e.g. DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys

and

, and

LOC I/O SETTINGS

SEL

—DI1—

press

. After a brief pause, the display shows the current settings for the

1001:START/STOP (E1)

selection.

—DI2—

—DI3—

EXIT

00:00

Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with keys

and

LOC

PAR EDIT

EDIT

and press

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

DI1

[1]

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

Specify a new value for the setting with keys

and

LOC

PAR EDIT

Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the

DI1,2

[2]

displayed value with the default value.

CANCEL

00:00

SAVE

• To save the new value, press

LOC I/O SETTINGS

—DI1—

CANCEL

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

1001:START/STOP (E1)

—DI2—

1001:DIR (E1)

—DI3—

EXIT

00:00

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Basic Control Panel

Features

The Basic Control Panel features:

• numeric control panel with an LCD display

• copy function - parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later

transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.

Overview

The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control

Panel.

No.

Use

LCD display - Divided into five areas:

a. Upper left - Control location:

LOC

LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the control panel

REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or fieldbus.

OUTPUT

FWD

b. Upper right - Unit of the displayed value.

c. Center - Variable; in general, shows parameter and signal values, menus or

RESET

EXIT

ENTER

lists. Shows also fault and alarm codes.

d. Lower left and center - Panel operation state:

OUTPUT: Output mode

PAR: Parameter mode

MENU: Main menu

FAULT

: Fault mode.

e. Lower right - Indicators:

FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation

Flashing slowly: stopped

Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint

Steady: running, at setpoint

: Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference

SET

modes).

RESET/EXIT - Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed

values. Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes.

MENU/ENTER - Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode,

saves the displayed value as the new setting.

Up -

• Scrolls up through a menu or list.

• Increases a value if a parameter is selected.

• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.

Holding the key down changes the value faster.

Down -

• Scrolls down through a menu or list.

• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.

• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.

Holding the key down changes the value faster.

LOC/REM - Changes between local and remote control of the drive.

DIR - Changes the direction of the motor rotation.

STOP - Stops the drive in local control.

START - Starts the drive in local control.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Operation

You operate the control panel with menus and keys. You select an option, e.g.

operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the

and

arrow keys until the

option is visible in the display and then pressing the

key.

With the

key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made

changes.

The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes: Output, Reference, Parameter, Copy

and Fault. The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter. When a

fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the

fault or alarm code. You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see

chapter Diagnostics).

After the power is switched on, the panel is in the

Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the

REM

direction, switch between local and remote control and

OUTPUT

FWD

monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do

other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the

REM

PAr

appropriate mode.

FWD

How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and

the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.

Task

Mode

Page

How to switch between local and remote control

Any

How to start and stop the drive

Any

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

Any

How to browse the monitored signals

Output

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Reference

How to change the value of a parameter

Parameter

How to select the monitored signals

Parameter

How to reset faults and alarms

Output, Fault

265

How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel

Copy

How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive

Copy

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control

You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be

able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.

Step

Action

Display

• To switch between remote control (REM shown on the left) and local

LOC

control (LOC shown on the left), press

REM

Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606

OUTPUT

FWD

LOCAL LOCK.

After pressing the key, the display briefly shows message “LoC” or “rE”,

LOC

as appropriate, before returning to the previous display.

LoC

FWD

The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM)

and controlled through the drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control

LOC

(LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press

. The result

REM

depends on how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display flashes “LoC”), the drive

stops. Set the local control reference as instructed on page 72.

• If you press the key for about two seconds (release when the display

changes from “LoC” to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The drive

copies the current remote values for the run/stop status and the

reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.

Text FWD or REV on the bottom

• To stop the drive in local control, press

line starts flashing slowly.

Text FWD or REV on the bottom

• To start the drive in local control, press

line starts flashing rapidly. It

stops flashing when the drive

reaches the setpoint.

How to change the direction of the motor rotation

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.

Step

Action

Display

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left), switch to local

LOC

control by pressing

REM

. The display briefly shows message “LoC” before

returning to the previous display.

OUTPUT

FWD

To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at the bottom) to

LOC

reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or vice versa, press

OUTPUT

REV

Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 (REQUEST).

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Output mode

In the Output mode, you can:

• monitor actual values of up to three Group 01: OPERATING DATA signals, one

signal at a time

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

You get to the Output mode by pressing

until the display shows text OUTPUT at

the bottom.

The display shows the value of one Group 01:

OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the

REM

right. Page 74 tells how to select up to three signals to

OUTPUT

FWD

be monitored in the Output mode. The table below

shows how to view them one at a time.

How to browse the monitored signals

Step

Action

Display

If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored (see page

REM

74), you can browse them in the Output mode.

OUTPUT

FWD

To browse the signals forward, press key

repeatedly. To browse

them backward, press key

repeatedly.

REM

OUTPUT

FWD

REM

OUTPUT

FWD

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Reference mode

In the Reference mode, you can:

• set the speed, frequency or torque reference

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode,

REM

otherwise by pressing

repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.

PAr

FWD

If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left), switch to local

LOC

control by pressing

. The display briefly shows “LoC” before switching

REM

PAr

to local control.

FWD

Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference

modification in remote control (REM).

If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not visible), press key

LOC

until you see “rEF” and then press

. Now the display

rEF

shows the current reference value with

SET

under the value.

FWD

LOC

SET

FWD

• To increase the reference value, press

LOC

• To decrease the reference value, press

SET

FWD

The value changes immediately when you press the key. It is stored in the

drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch-off.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Parameter mode

In the Parameter mode, you can:

• view and change parameter values

• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode

• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

How to select a parameter and change its value

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode,

LOC

otherwise by pressing

repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.

rEF

FWD

If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not visible), press key

LOC

until you see “PAr” and then press

. The display

PAr

shows the number of one of the parameter groups.

FWD

LOC

-01-

PAR

FWD

Use keys

and

to find the desired parameter group.

LOC

-11-

PAR

FWD

Press

. The display shows one of the parameters in the selected

LOC

group.

1101

PAR

FWD

Use keys

and

to find the desired parameter.

LOC

1103

PAR

FWD

Press and hold

for about two seconds until the display shows the

LOC

value of the parameter with

SET

underneath indicating that changing of the

value is now possible.

PAR

SET

FWD

Note: When

SET

is visible, pressing keys

and

simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the

parameter.

Use keys

and

to select the parameter value. When you have

LOC

changed the parameter value,

SET

starts flashing.

PAR

SET

FWD

• To save the displayed parameter value, press

LOC

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press

1103

PAR

FWD

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to select the monitored signals

Step

Action

Display

You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how

LOC

they are displayed with Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page

103

55 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values.

PAR

SET

FWD

By default, you can monitor three signals by browsing (see page 71). The

LOC

particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC

104

MACRO: For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL

PAR

SET

FWD

MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED, otherwise

LOC

0103 OUTPUT FREQ. The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104

105

CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE, respectively.

PAR

SET

FWD

To change the default signals, select from Group 01: OPERATING DATA

up to three signals to be browsed.

Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index

of the signal parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA (= number of the

parameter without the leading zero), e.g. 105 means parameter 0105

TORQUE. Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.

Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 (3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).

For example, if 3401 = 0 and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the

signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all three parameters are

set to 0, i.e. no signals are selected for monitoring, the panel displays text

“n.A”.

Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal point location and

LOC

unit of the source signal [setting (9 (DIRECT)]. Bar graphs are not available

for Basic Operation Panel. For details, see parameter 3404.

PAR

SET

FWD

Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM

Signal 2: parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM

Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.

Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if

LOC

parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see

parameter 3405.

PAR

SET

FWD

Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT

Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT

Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.

Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and

LOC

maximum display values. This has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is

set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407.

PAR

SET

FWD

Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX

LOC

Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX

Signal 3: parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX.

PAR

SET

FWD

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Copy mode

The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user

sets of drive parameters to the control panel. The control panel memory is non-

volatile.

In the Copy mode, you can:

•

copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL - Upload). This

includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the

user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.

•

restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A - Download

All). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable motor

parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.

Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to

systems that are identical to the original system.

•

copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P - Download

Partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,

parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group 51: EXT COMM

MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.

The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.

•

copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 - Download

User Set 1). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and the

internal motor parameters.

The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved

using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User parameter sets on page

88) and then uploaded to panel.

•

copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u2 - Download

User Set 2). As dL u1 - Download User Set 1 above.

•

start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above.

Step

Action

Display

Go to the Main menu by pressing

if you are in the Output mode,

LOC

otherwise by pressing

repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.

PAr

FWD

If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not visible), press key

LOC

until you see “CoPY”.

CoPY

FWD

Press

LOC

dL u1

FWD

• To upload all parameters (including user sets) from the drive to the control

LOC

panel, step to “uL” with keys

and

FWD

Press

. During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a

LOC

percentage of completion.

uL 50

FWD

• To perform downloads, step to the appropriate operation (here “dL A”,

LOC

Download All, is used as an example) with keys

and

dL A

FWD

Press

. During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a

LOC

percentage of completion.

dL 50

FWD

Basic Control Panel alarm codes

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Diagnostics),

the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx.

See section Alarm codes (Basic Control Panel) on page 269 for a list of the alarm

codes and descriptions.

Control panels

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Application macros

Macros change a group of parameters to new, predefined values. Use macros to

minimize the need for manual editing of parameters. Selecting a macro sets all other

parameters to their default values, except:

• Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters (except parameter 9904)

•

1602 PARAMETER LOCK

•

1607 PARAM SAVE

•

3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME

•

9802 COMM PROT SEL

• Group 50: ENCODER … Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters

• Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters.

After selecting a macro, you can make additional parameter changes manually with

the control panel.

You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC

MACRO. By default, 1, ABB STANDARD, is the enabled macro.

The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a

connection example for each macro.

The last section in this chapter, Macro default values for parameters, lists the

parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each

macro.

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB Standard macro

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration,

with three (3) constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values defined in

section Complete parameter list on page 91.

Connection example:

1…10 kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External frequency reference 1: 0…10 V¹

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

Not used

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Output frequency: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/Stop: Activate to start

DI2

Fwd/Rev: Activate to reverse rotation direction

DI3

Constant speed selection²

DI4

Constant speed selection²

DI5

Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd acc/dec ramp pair

DI6

Not used

Note 1. The external reference is

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

used as a speed reference if a vector

RO1A

Default operation:

mode is selected.

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

Note 2. Code:

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

0 = open, 1 = connected

RO2A

Default operation:

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

DI3

DI4

Output

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

Reference through AI1

RO3A

Default operation:

CONST SPEED 1 (1202)

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

CONST SPEED 2 (1203)

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

CONST SPEED 3 (1204)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Analog reference (AI1)

• Analog output AO1: Frequency

•

Start, stop and direction (DI1,2)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Constant speed selection (DI3,4)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

Ramp pair (1 of 2) selection (DI5)

• Relay output 2: Running

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

3-wire macro

This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It

provides three (3) constant speeds. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to

(3-WIRE).

Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start/stop

buttons are disabled.

Connection example:

1…10 kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External speed reference 1: 0…10 V

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

Not used

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start: Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive

DI2

Stop: Momentary deactivation stops the drive

DI3

Fwd/Rev: Activation reverses rotation direction

DI4

Constant speed selection¹

DI5

Constant speed selection¹

DI6

Not used

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

RO1A

Default operation:

Note 1. Code:

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

0 = open, 1 = connected

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

RO2A

Default operation:

DI4

DI5

Output

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

Reference through AI1

CONST SPEED 1 (1202)

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

RO3A

Default operation:

CONST SPEED 2 (1203)

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

CONST SPEED 3 (1204)

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Analog reference (AI1)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Start, stop and direction (DI1,2,3)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Constant speed selection (DI4,5)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

• Relay output 2: Running

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Alternate macro

This macro provides an I/O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control

signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable, set the

value of parameter 9902 to 3 (ALTERNATE).

Connection example:

1…10 kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External speed reference 1: 0…10 V

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

Not used

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start fwd: If DI1 state is the same as DI2, the drive stops

DI2

Start reverse

DI3

Constant speed selection¹

DI4

Constant speed selection¹

DI5

Ramp pair selection: Activation selects 2nd acc/dec ramp pair

DI6

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

RO1A

Default operation:

Note 1. Code:

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

0 = open, 1 = connected

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

DI3

DI4

Output

RO2A

Default operation:

Reference through AI1

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

CONST SPEED 1 (1202)

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

CONST SPEED 2 (1203)

RO3A

Default operation:

CONST SPEED 3 (1204)

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Analog reference (AI1)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Start, stop and direction (DI1,2)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Constant speed selection (DI3,4)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

Ramp pair 1/2 selection (DI5)

• Relay output 2: Running

•

Run enable (DI6)

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Motor Potentiometer macro

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the

motor using only digital signals. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to

(MOTOR POT).

Connection example:

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

Not used

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

Not used

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/stop: Activation starts the drive.

DI2

Forward/reverse: Activation reverses rotation direction.

DI3

Reference up: Activation increases the reference¹

DI4

Reference down: Activation decreases the reference¹

DI5

Constant speed 1: 1202

DI6

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive.

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

RO1A

Default operation:

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

Note 1. For DI3 and DI4:

RO2A

Default operation:

• If both are active or inactive the

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

speed reference is unchanged.

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

• The existing speed reference is

RO3A

Default operation:

stored during stop or power down.

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

Note 2.

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

• Settings of the ramp times with

acceleration and deceleration time

2 (parameters 2205 and 2206).

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Start, stop and direction (DI1,2)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Reference up/down (DI3,4)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Constant speed selection (DI5)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

Run enable (DI6)

• Relay output 2: Running

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Hand-Auto macro

This macro provides an I/O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications.

To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 (HAND/AUTO).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).

Connection example:

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

1…10

kohm

AI1

External reference 1: 0…10 V (Hand Control)

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

External reference 2: 0…20 mA (Auto Control)

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive

DI2

Forward/Reverse (Hand): Activation reverses rotation direction

DI3

EXT1/EXT2 Selection: Activation selects auto control

DI4

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

DI5

Forward/Reverse (Auto): Activation reverses rotation direction

DI6

Start/Stop (Auto): Activation starts the drive

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

RO1A

Default operation:

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

Note 1.

RO2A

Default operation:

The sensor for AI2 is powered

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

externally. See the manufacturer’s

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

instructions. To use sensors

RO3A

Default operation:

supplied by the drive aux. voltage

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

output, see page 86.

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Two analog references (AI1, 2)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Start/stop - hand/auto (DI1, 6)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Direction - hand/auto (DI2, 5)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

Control location selection (DI3)

• Relay output 2: Running

•

Run enable (DI4)

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

PID Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as

pressure control, flow control, etc. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to

(PID CONTROL).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).

Connection example:

1…10 kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID): 0…10 V¹

AGND

Analog input circuit common

Note 1.

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

Manual: 0…10V => speed reference

AI2

Actual signal (PID): 4…20 mA

PID: 0…10V => 0…100% PID

AGND

Analog input circuit common

setpoint

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

Note 3.

AGND

Analog output circuit common

The sensor for AI2 is powered exter-

nally. See the manufacturer’s instruc-

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

tions. To use sensors supplied by the

24V

drive aux. voltage output, see page 86.

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive

DI2

EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation selects PID control

DI3

Constant speed selection 1: (Not used in PID control)²

DI4

Constant speed selection 2: (Not used in PID control)²

DI5

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

DI6

Start/Stop (PID): Activation starts the drive

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

RO1A

Default operation:

Note 2. Code:

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

0 = open, 1 = connected

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

DI3

DI4

Output

RO2A

Default operation:

Reference through AI1

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

CONST SPEED 1 (1202)

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

CONST SPEED 2 (1203)

RO3A

Default operation:

CONST SPEED 3 (1204)

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Analog reference (AI1)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Actual value (AI2)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Start/stop - hand/PID (DI1, 6)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI2)

• Relay output 2: Running

•

Constant speed selection (DI3, 4)

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Run enable (DI5)

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Note: Use the following switch-on order:

1. EXT1/EXT2

2. Run Enable

3. Start.

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

PFC macro

This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.

To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 (PFC CONTROL).

Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).

Connection example:

1…10 kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V¹

AGND

Analog input circuit common

Note 1.

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

Manual: 0…10V => 0…50 Hz

AI2

Actual signal (PID): 4…20 mA

PID/PFC: 0…10V => 0…100% PID

AGND

Analog input circuit common

setpoint

AO1

Output frequency: 0…20 mA

AO2

Actual 1 (PI controller actual value): 0(4)…20 mA

AGND

Analog output circuit common

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/Stop (Manual): Activation starts the drive

DI2

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

DI3

EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation selects PFC control

DI4

Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive

DI5

Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor

DI6

Start/Stop (PFC): Activation starts the drive

Note 2.

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

The sensor for AI2 is powered exter-

RO1A

Default operation:

nally. See the manufacturer’s instruc-

RO1B

Running =>19 connected to 21

tions. To use sensors supplied by the

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

drive aux. voltage output, see page 86.

RO2A

Default operation:

RO2B

Fault (-1) =>22 connected to 24 (Fault => 22 connected to 23)

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

RO3A

Default operation:

RO3B

Auxiliary motor switched on=>25 connected to 27

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Analog ref. and actual (AI1, 2)

• Analog output AO1: Frequency

•

Start/stop - manual/PFC (DI1, 6)

• Analog output AO2: Actual 1

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Run enable (DI2)

• Relay output 1: Running

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3)

• Relay output 2: Fault (-1)

•

Interlock (DI4, 5)

• Relay output 3: Aux. motor ON

AI1: 0…10 V

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Note: Use the following switch-on order:

1. EXT1/EXT2

2. Run Enable

3. Start.

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Torque Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of

the motor. Control can also be switched to speed control. To enable, set the value of

parameter 9902 to 8 (TORQUE CTRL).

Connection example:

1…10

kohm

SCR

Signal cable shield (screen)

AI1

External speed reference 1: 0…10 V

AGND

Analog input circuit common

10V

Reference voltage 10 V DC

AI2

External torque reference: 4…20 mA

AGND

Analog input circuit common

AO1

Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

Note 1.

AO2

Output current: 0…20 mA

• Reverses rotation direction in

AGND

Analog output circuit common

speed control.

24V

Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

• Reverses torque direction in

GND

Auxiliary voltage output common

torque control.

DCOM

Digital input common for all

DI1

Start/stop: Activation starts the drive.

DI2

Forward/reverse: Activation reverses direction¹

DI3

Speed/torque control: Activation selects torque control

DI4

Constant speed 1: 1202

DI5

Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd acc/dec ramp pair

DI6

Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

RO1C

Relay output 1, programmable

Note 2.

RO1A

Default operation:

The sensor for AI2 is powered

RO1B

Ready =>19 connected to 21

externally. See the manufacturer’s

RO2C

Relay output 2, programmable

instructions. To use sensors supplied

RO2A

Default operation:

by the drive aux. voltage output, see

RO2B

Running =>22 connected to 24

page 86.

RO3C

Relay output 3, programmable

RO3A

Default operation:

RO3B

Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27

(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Input signals

Output signals

Jumper setting

•

Two analog references (AI1, 2)

• Analog output AO1: Speed

•

Start/stop and direction (DI1, 2)

• Analog output AO2: Current

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Speed/torque control (DI3)

• Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

•

Constant speed selection (DI4)

• Relay output 2: Running

•

Ramp pair 1/2 selection (DI5)

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)

AI1: 0…10 V

•

Run enable (DI6)

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors

Many applications use process PI(D) and need a feedback signal from the process.

The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 (AI2).

The macro wiring diagrams for each macro earlier in this chapter use an externally

powered sensor (connections not shown). The figures below give examples of

connections using a two-wire or three-wire sensor/transmitter supplied by the drive

auxiliary voltage output.

Two-wire sensor/transmitter

X1 / control board

–

4…20 mA

AI2

Process actual value measurement,

AGND

0(4) … 20 mA, Rin

= 100 ohm

…

X1 / control board

+24 V

Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,

GND

24 V DC, 250 mA

Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply voltage (+24 V).

Thus the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA

Three-wire sensor/transmitter

X1 / control board

OUT

0(4)…20 mA

AI2

Process actual value measurement,

AGND

0(4) … 20 mA, Rin

= 100 ohm

…

X1 / control board

+24 V

Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,

GND

24 V DC, 250 mA

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

User parameter sets

In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to save two user

parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time. A user

parameter set consists of the user parameter settings, including Group 99: START-

UP DATA, and the results of the motor identification. The panel reference is also

saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control. The remote

control setting is saved into the user parameter set, but the local control setting is

not.

The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1. The procedure

for User Parameter Set 2 is identical, only the parameter 9902 values are different.

To save User Parameter Set 1:

• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the

application but it is not done yet.

• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the

permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to -1 (USER S1 SAVE).

SAVE

ENTER

• Press

(Assistant Control Panel) or

(Basic Control Panel).

To load User Parameter Set 1:

• Change parameter 9902 to 0 (USER S1 LOAD).

SAVE

ENTER

• Press

(Assistant Control Panel) or

(Basic Control Panel) to load.

The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter

1605).

Note: Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including

Group 99: START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that

the settings correspond to the motor used.

Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having

to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the

motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor

identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter

sets. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user parameter set needs

to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Macro default values for parameters

Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 91.

Changing from the default macro (ABB Standard), that is, editing the value of

parameter 9902, changes the parameter default values as defined in the following

tables.

Note: There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz/

IEC compliance (ACS550-01) and 60 Hz/NEMA compliance (ACS550-U1).

ACS550-01

Motor

ABB

PID

PFC

Torque

Parameter

3-wire

Alternate

Potenti-

Hand-auto

Standard

Control

ometer

9902

APPLIC MACRO

1 =

2 =

3 =

4 =

5 =

6 =

7 =

8 =

ABB STANDARD

3-WIRE

ALTERNATE

MOTOR POT

HAND/AUTO

PID CONTROL

PFC CONTROL

TORQUE CTRL

9904

MOTOR CTRL

3 = SCALAR:

1 = VECTOR:

3 = SCALAR:

2 = VECTOR:

MODE

FREQ

SPEED

FREQ

TORQUE

1001

EXT1 COMMANDS

2 = DI1,2

4 = DI1P,2P,3

9 = DI1F,2R

2 = DI1,2

1 = DI1

2 = DI1,2

1002

EXT2 COMMANDS

0 = NOT SEL

7 = DI6,5

6 = DI6

2 = DI1,2

1003

DIRECTION

3 = REQUEST

1 = FORWARD

3 = REQUEST

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

0 = EXT1

3 = DI3

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

1103

REF1 SELECT

1 = AI1

12 =

1 = AI1

DI3U,4D(NC)

1106

REF2 SELECT

2 = AI2

19 = PID1OUT

2 = AI2

1201

CONST SPEED SEL

9 = DI3,4

10 = DI4,5

9 = DI3,4

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

9 = DI3,4

0 = NOT SEL

4 = DI4

1304

MINIMUM AI2

0.0%

20.0%

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

1 = READY

2 = RUN

1 = READY

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

2 = RUN

3 = FAULT(-1)

2 = RUN

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

3 = FAULT(-1)

31 = PFC

3 = FAULT(-1)

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

104 =

130 =

104 =

CURRENT

PID 1 FBK

CURRENT

1510

MINIMUM AO2

0.0 mA

4.0 mA

0.0 mA

1601

RUN ENABLE

0 = NOT SEL

6 = DI6

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

2 = DI2

6 = DI6

2201

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

5 = DI5

3201

SUPERV 1 PARAM

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

3401

SIGNAL1 PARAM

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

4001

GAIN

1.0

2.5

1.0

4002

INTEGRATION TIME

60.0 s

3.0 s

60.0 s

4101

GAIN

1.0

2.5

1.0

4102

INTEGRATION TIME

60.0 s

3.0 s

60.0 s

8123

PFC ENABLE

0 = NOT SEL

1 = ACTIVE

0 = NOT SEL

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ACS550-U1

Motor

ABB

PID

PFC

Torque

Parameter

3-wire

Alternate

Potenti-

Hand-auto

Standard

Control

ometer

9902

APPLIC MACRO

1 =

2 =

3 =

4 =

5 =

6 =

7 =

8 =

ABB STANDARD3-WIRE

ALTERNATE

MOTOR POT

HAND/AUTO

PID CONTROL

PFC CONTROL

TORQUE CTRL

9904

MOTOR CTRL

3 = SCALAR:

1 = VECTOR:

3 = SCALAR:

2 = VECTOR:

MODE

FREQ

SPEED

FREQ

TORQUE

1001

EXT1 COMMANDS

2 = DI1,2

4 = DI1P,2P,3

9 = DI1F,2R

2 = DI1,2

1 = DI1

2 = DI1,2

1002

EXT2 COMMANDS

0 = NOT SEL

7 = DI6,5

6 = DI6

2 = DI1,2

1003

DIRECTION

3 = REQUEST

1 = FORWARD

3 = REQUEST

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

0 = EXT1

3 = DI3

2 = DI2

3 = DI3

1103

REF1 SELECT

1 = AI1

12 =

1 = AI1

DI3U,4D(NC)

1106

REF2 SELECT

2 = AI2

19 = PID1OUT

2 = AI2

1201

CONST SPEED SEL

9 = DI3,4

10 = DI4,5

9 = DI3,4

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

9 = DI3,4

0 = NOT SEL

4 = DI4

1304

MINIMUM AI2

0.0%

20.0%

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

1 = READY

2 = RUN

1 = READY

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

2 = RUN

3 = FAULT(-1)

2 = RUN

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

3 = FAULT(-1)

31 = PFC

3 = FAULT(-1)

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

104 =

130 =

104 =

CURRENT

PID 1 FBK

CURRENT

1510

MINIMUM AO2

0.0 mA

4.0 mA

0.0 mA

1601

RUN ENABLE

0 = NOT SEL

6 = DI6

4 = DI4

5 = DI5

2 = DI2

6 = DI6

2201

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

5 = DI5

0 = NOT SEL

5 = DI5

3201

SUPERV 1 PARAM

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

3401

SIGNAL1 PARAM

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

103 = 0103

102 = 0102

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

OUTPUT FREQ

SPEED

4001

GAIN

1.0

2.5

1.0

4002

INTEGRATION TIME

60.0 s

3.0 s

60.0 s

4101

GAIN

1.0

2.5

1.0

4102

INTEGRATION TIME

60.0 s

3.0 s

60.0 s

8123

PFC ENABLE

0 = NOT SEL

1 = ACTIVE

0 = NOT SEL

Application macros

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Parameters

Complete parameter list

The following table lists all parameters. Table header abbreviations are:

• S = Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped.

• User = Space to enter desired parameter values.

Some values depend on the “construction” as indicated in the table by

“-01:” = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance or

“-U1:” = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance.

Refer to the type designation on the drive, for example ACS550-01-08A8-4.

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

Group 99: START-UP DATA

9901

LANGUAGE

0…16 / 0…3

0 (ENGLISH)

9902

APPLIC MACRO

-3…8, 31

1 (ABB STANDARD)



9904

MOTOR CTRL MODE

1 = VECTOR:SPEED, 2 = VECTOR:TORQUE,

3 (SCALAR:FREQ)



3 = SCALAR:FREQ

9905

MOTOR NOM VOLT

-01-yyyy-2: 115…345 V /

-01-yyyy-2: 230 V /



-U1-yyyy-2: 115…345 V

-U1-yyyy-2: 230 V

-01-yyyy-4: 200…600 V /

-01:-yyyy-4 400 V /

-U1-yyyy-4: 230…690 V

-U1-yyyy-4: 460

-U1-yyyy-6: 288…862 V

-U1-yyyy-6: 575

9906

MOTOR NOM CURR

0.2 · I_2hd … 2.0 · I_2hd

0.1 A

1.0 · I_2hd



9907

MOTOR NOM FREQ

10.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 50.0 Hz /



-U1: 60.0 Hz

9908

MOTOR NOM SPEED

50…30000 rpm

1 rpm

Size dependent



9909

MOTOR NOM POWER

0.2…3.0 · P_hd

-01: 0.1 kW /

1.0 · P_hd



-U1: 0.1 hp

9910

ID RUN

0 = OFF/IDMAGN, 1 = ON

0 (OFF/IDMAGN)



9915

MOTOR COSPHI

0 = IDENTIFIED, 0.01…0.97

0.01

0 (IDENTIFIED)



Group 01: OPERATING DATA

0101

SPEED & DIR

-30000…30000 rpm

1 rpm

0102

SPEED

0…30000 rpm

1 rpm

0103

OUTPUT FREQ

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

0104

CURRENT

0.0…2.0 · I_2hd

0.1 A

0105

TORQUE

-200.0…200.0%

0.1%

0106

POWER

-2.0…2.0 · P_hd

0.1 kW

0107

DC BUS VOLTAGE

0…2.5 · V_dN

0109

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

0…2.0 · V_dN

0110

DRIVE TEMP

0.0…150.0 C

0.1 C

0111

EXTERNAL REF 1

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1 rpm

0112

EXTERNAL REF 2

0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque)

0.1%

0113

CTRL LOCATION

0 = LOCAL, 1 = EXT1, 2 = EXT2

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

0114

RUN TIME (R)

0…9999 h

0115

KWH COUNTER (R)

0…65535 kWh

1 kWh

0116

APPL BLK OUTPUT

0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque)

0.1%

0118

DI 1-3 STATUS

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0119

DI 4-6 STATUS

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0120

AI 1

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0121

AI 2

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0122

RO 1-3 STATUS

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0123

RO 4-6 STATUS

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0124

AO 1

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

0125

AO 2

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

0126

PID 1 OUTPUT

-1000.0…1000.0%

0.1%

0127

PID 2 OUTPUT

-100.0…100.0%

0.1%

0128

PID 1 SETPNT

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/

4106 and 4007/4107

0129

PID 2 SETPNT

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

4207

0130

PID 1 FBK

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/

4106 and 4007/4107

0131

PID 2 FBK

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

4207

0132

PID 1 DEVIATION

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/

4106 and 4007/4107

0133

PID 2 DEVIATION

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

4207

0134

COMM RO WORD

0…65535

0135

COMM VALUE 1

-32768…+32767

0136

COMM VALUE 2

-32768…+32767

0137

PROCESS VAR 1

0138

PROCESS VAR 2

0139

PROCESS VAR 3

0140

RUN TIME

0.00…499.99 kh

0.01 kh

0141

MWH COUNTER

0…65535 MWh

1 MWh

0142

REVOLUTION CNTR

0…65535 Mrev

1 Mrev

0143

DRIVE ON TIME HI

0…65535 days

1 day

0144

DRIVE ON TIME LO

00:00:00…23:59:58

1 = 2 s

0145

MOTOR TEMP

Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C

Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm

Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1

0146

MECH ANGLE

0…32768

0147

MECH REVS

-32768 …+32767

0148

Z PLS DETECTED

0 = NOT DETECTED, 1 = DETECTED

0150

CB TEMP

-20.0…150.0 °C

1.0 °C

0153

MOT THERM STRESS

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0158

PID COMM VALUE 1

-32768 …+32767

0159

PID COMM VALUE 2

-32768 …+32767

0174

SAVED KWH

0.0…999.9 kWh

0.1 kWh

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

0175

SAVED MWH

0…65535 MWh

1 MWh

0176

SAVED AMOUNT 1

0.0…999.9

0.1

0177

SAVED AMOUNT 2

0…65535

0178

SAVED CO2

0.0…6553.5 tn

0.1 tn

Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

0301

FB CMD WORD 1

0302

FB CMD WORD 2

0303

FB STS WORD 1

0304

FB STS WORD 2

0305

FAULT WORD 1

0306

FAULT WORD 2

0307

FAULT WORD 3

0308

ALARM WORD 1

0309

ALARM WORD 2

Group 04: FAULT HISTORY

0401

LAST FAULT

Fault codes (panel displays as text)

0402

FAULT TIME 1

Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days

1 day

0403

FAULT TIME 2

Time hh.mm.ss

0404

SPEED AT FLT

-32768…+32767

1 rpm

0405

FREQ AT FLT

-3276.8…+3276.7

0.1 Hz

0406

VOLTAGE AT FLT

0.0…6553.5

0.1 V

0407

CURRENT AT FLT

0.0…6553.5

0.1 A

0408

TORQUE AT FLT

-3276.8…+3276.7

0.1%

0409

STATUS AT FLT

0000…FFFF hex

0410

DI 1-3 AT FLT

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0411

DI 4-6 AT FLT

000…111 (0…7 decimal)

0412

PREVIOUS FAULT 1

As par. 0401

0413

PREVIOUS FAULT 2

As par. 0401

Group 10: START/STOP/DIR

1001

EXT1 COMMANDS

0…14

2 (DI1,2)



1002

EXT2 COMMANDS

0…14

0 (NOT SEL)



1003

DIRECTION

1 = FORWARD, 2 = REVERSE,

3 (REQUEST)



3 = REQUEST

1004

JOGGING SEL

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)



Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT

1101

KEYPAD REF SEL

1 = REF1(Hz/rpm), 2 = REF2(%)

1 [REF1(Hz/rpm)]

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

-6…12

0 (EXT1)



1103

REF1 SELECT

0…17, 20…21

1 (AI1)



1104

REF1 MIN

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1 rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

1105

REF1 MAX

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1 rpm

-01: 50.0 (52.0) Hz /

1500 rpm

-U1: 60.0 (62.0) Hz /

1800 rpm

1106

REF2 SELECT

0…17, 19…21

2 (AI2)



1107

REF2 MIN

0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque)

0.1%

0.0%

1108

REF2 MAX

0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque)

0.1%

100.0%

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS

1201

CONST SPEED SEL

-14 …19

9 (DI3,4)



1202

CONST SPEED 1

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 5.0 Hz / 300 rpm

-U1: 6.0 Hz / 360 rpm

1203

CONST SPEED 2

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 10.0 Hz / 600 rpm

-U1: 12.0 Hz / 720 rpm

1204

CONST SPEED 3

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 15.0 Hz / 900 rpm

-U1: 18.0 Hz / 1080 rpm

1205

CONST SPEED 4

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 20.0 Hz / 1200 rpm

-U1: 24.0 Hz / 1440 rpm

1206

CONST SPEED 5

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 25.0 Hz / 1500 rpm

-U1: 30.0 Hz / 1800 rpm

1207

CONST SPEED 6

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 40.0 Hz / 2400 rpm

-U1: 48.0 Hz / 2880 rpm

1208

CONST SPEED 7

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

-01: 50.0 Hz / 3000 rpm

-U1: 60.0 Hz / 3600 rpm

1209

TIMED MODE SEL

1 = EXT/CS1/2/3, 2

= CS1/2/3/4

2 (CS1/2/3/4)



Group 13: ANALOG INPUTS

1301

MINIMUM AI1

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

1302

MAXIMUM AI1

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

100.0%

1303

FILTER AI1

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

1304

MINIMUM AI2

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

1305

MAXIMUM AI2

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

100.0%

1306

FILTER AI2

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

0…44, 46, 47, 52

1 (READY)

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

0…44, 46, 47, 52

2 (RUN)

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

0…44, 46, 47, 52

3 [FAULT(-1)]

1404

RO 1 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1405

RO 1 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1406

RO 2 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1407

RO 2 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1408

RO 3 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1409

RO 3 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1410

RELAY OUTPUT 4

0…44, 46, 47, 52

0 (NOT SEL)

1411

RELAY OUTPUT 5

0…44, 46, 47, 52

0 (NOT SEL)

1412

RELAY OUTPUT 6

0…44, 46, 47, 52

0 (NOT SEL)

1413

RO 4 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1414

RO 4 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1415

RO 5 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1416

RO 5 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1417

RO 6 ON DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

1418

RO 6 OFF DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

99…178

103 (parameter 0103

OUTPUT FREQ)

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

1502

AO1 CONTENT MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 1501

1503

AO1 CONTENT MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 1501

1504

MINIMUM AO1

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

0.0 mA

1505

MAXIMUM AO1

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

20.0 mA

1506

FILTER AO1

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

99…178

104 (parameter 0104

CURRENT)

1508

AO2 CONTENT MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 1507

1509

AO2 CONTENT MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 1507

1510

MINIMUM AO2

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

0.0 mA

1511

MAXIMUM AO2

0.0…20.0 mA

0.1 mA

20.0 mA

1512

FILTER AO2

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS

1601

RUN ENABLE

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)



1602

PARAMETER LOCK

0 = LOCKED, 1

= OPEN, 2 = NOT SAVED

1 (OPEN)

1603

PASS CODE

0…65535

1604

FAULT RESET sEL

-6…8

0 (KEYPAD)

1605

USER PAR SET CHG

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)

1606

LOCAL LOCK

-6…8

0 (NOT SEL)

1607

PARAM SAVE

0 = DONE, 1 = SAVE…

0 (DONE)

1608

START ENABLE 1

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)



1609

START ENABLE 2

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)



1610

DISPLAY ALARMS

0 = NO, 1 = YES

0 (NO)

1611

PARAMETER VIEW

0 = DEFAULT, 1 = FLASHDROP

0 (DEFAULT)

1612

FAN CONTROL

0 = AUTO,1 = ON

0 (AUTO)

1613

FAULT RESET

0 = DEFAULT, 1 = RESET NOW

0 (DEFAULT)

Group 20: LIMITS

2001

MINIMUM SPEED

-30000…30000 rpm

1 rpm

0 rpm



2002

MAXIMUM SPEED

0…30000 rpm

1 rpm

-01: 1500 rpm /



-U1: 1800 rpm

2003

MAX CURRENT

0… 1.8 · I_2hd

0.1 A

1.8 · I_2hd



2005

OVERVOLT CTRL

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

1 (ENABLE)

2006

UNDERVOLT CTRL

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE(TIME),

1 [ENABLE(TIME)]

2 = ENABLE

2007

MINIMUM FREQ

-500.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

0.0 Hz



2008

MAXIMUM FREQ

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 50.0 (52.0) Hz /



-U1: 60.0 (62.0) Hz

2013

MIN TORQUE SEL

-6…7

0 (MIN TORQUE 1)

2014

MAX TORQUE SEL

-6…7

0 (MAX TORQUE 1)

2015

MIN TORQUE 1

-600.0…0.0%

0.1%

-300.0%

2016

MIN TORQUE 2

-600.0…0.0%

0.1%

-300.0%

2017

MAX TORQUE 1

0.0…600.0%

0.1%

300.0%

2018

MAX TORQUE 2

0.0…600.0%

0.1%

300.0%

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

Group 21: START/STOP

2101

START FUNCTION

Vector control modes: 1, 2, 8

8 (RAMP)



Scalar control mode: 1…5, 8

2102

STOP FUNCTION

1 = COAST, 2 = RAMP

1 (COAST)

2103

DC MAGN TIME

0.00…10.00 s

0.01 s

0.30 s

2104

DC HOLD CTL

0 = NOT SEL, 1 = DC HOLD,

0 (NOT SEL)



2 = DC BRAKING

2105

DC HOLD SPEED

0…360 rpm

1 rpm

5 rpm

2106

DC CURR REF

0…100%

30%

2107

DC BRAKE TIME

0.0…250.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

2108

START INHIBIT

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 (OFF)

2109

EMERG STOP SEL

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)

2110

TORQ BOOST CURR

15…300%

100%

2112

ZERO SPEED DELAY

0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…60.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s (NOT SEL)

2113

START DELAY

0.00…60.00 s

0.01 s

0.00 s

Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL

2201

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

-6…7

5 (DI5)

2202

ACCELER TIME 1

0.0…1800.0 s

0.1 s

5.0 s

2203

DECELER TIME 1

0.0…1800.0 s

0.1 s

5.0 s

2204

RAMP SHAPE 1

0.0 = LINEAR, 0.1…1000.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

2205

ACCELER TIME 2

0.0…1800.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

2206

DECELER TIME 2

0.0…1800.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

2207

RAMP SHAPE 2

0.0 = LINEAR, 0.1…1000.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

2208

EMERG DEC TIME

0.0…1800.0 s

0.1 s

1.0 s

2209

RAMP INPUT 0

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)

Group 23: SPEED CONTROL

2301

PROP GAIN

0.00…200.00

0.01

5.00

2302

INTEGRATION TIME

0.00…600.00 s

0.01 s

0.50 s

2303

DERIVATION TIME

0…10000 ms

1 ms

0 ms

2304

ACC COMPENSATION

0.00…600.00 s

0.01 s

0.00 s

2305

AUTOTUNE RUN

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 (OFF)

Group 24: TORQUE CONTROL

2401

TORQ RAMP UP

0.00…120.00 s

0.01 s

0.00 s

2402

TORQ RAMP DOWN

0.00…120.00 s

0.01 s

0.00 s

Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS

2501

CRIT SPEED SEL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 (OFF)

2502

CRIT SPEED 1 LO

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

2503

CRIT SPEED 1 HI

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

2504

CRIT SPEED 2 LO

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

2505

CRIT SPEED 2 HI

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

2506

CRIT SPEED 3 LO

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

2507

CRIT SPEED 3 HI

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1

rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL

2601

FLUX OPT ENABLE

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 (OFF)

2602

FLUX BRAKING

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

0 (OFF)

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

2603

IR COMP VOLT

0.0…100.0 V

0.1 V

Size dependent

2604

IR COMP FREQ

0…100%

80%

2605

U/F RATIO

1 = LINEAR, 2 = SQUARED

1 (LINEAR)

2606

SWITCHING FREQ

1, 2, 4, 8, 12 kHz

4 kHz

2607

SWITCH FREQ CTRL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

1 (ON)

2608

SLIP COMP RATIO

0…200%

2609

NOISE SMOOTHING

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

2619

DC STABILIZER

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

2625

OVERMODULATION

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG

2901

COOLING FAN TRIG

0.0…6553.5 kh, 0.0 disables

0.1 kh

0.0 kh

2902

COOLING FAN ACT

0.0…6553.5 kh

0.1 kh

0.0 kh

2903

REVOLUTION TRIG

0…65535 Mrev, 0 disables

1 Mrev

0 Mrev

2904

REVOLUTION ACT

0…65535 Mrev

1 Mrev

0 Mrev

2905

RUN TIME TRIG

0.0…6553.5 kh, 0.0 disables

0.1 kh

0.0 kh

2906

RUN TIME ACT

0.0…6553.5 kh

0.1 kh

0.0 kh

2907

USER MWh TRIG

0.0…6553.5 MWh, 0.0 disables

0.1 MWh

0.0 MWh

2908

USER MWh ACT

0.0…6553.5 MWh

0.1 MWh

0.0 MWh

Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS

3001

AI<MIN FUNCTION

0…3

0 (NOT SEL)

3002

PANEL COMM ERR

1…3

1 (FAULT)

3003

EXTERNAL FAULT 1

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)

3004

EXTERNAL FAULT 2

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)

3005

MOT THERM PROT

0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM

1 (FAULT)

3006

MOT THERM TIME

256…9999 s

500 s

3007

MOT LOAD CURVE

50…150%

100%

3008

ZERO SPEED LOAD

25…150%

70%

3009

BREAK POINT FREQ

1…250 Hz

1 Hz

35 Hz

3010

STALL FUNCTION

0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM

0 (NOT SEL)

3011

STALL FREQUENCY

0.5…50.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

20.0 Hz

3012

STALL TIME

10…400 s

1 s

20 s

3017

EARTH FAULT

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

1 (ENABLE)



3018

COMM FAULT FUNC

0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = CONST SP 7,

0 (NOT SEL)

3 = LAST SPEED

3019

COMM FAULT TIME

0.0…600.0 s

0.1 s

3.0 s

3021

AI1 FAULT LIMIT

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

3022

AI2 FAULT LIMIT

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

3023

WIRING FAULT

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

1 (ENABLE)



3024

CB TEMP FAULT

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

1 (ENABLE)

3028

EARTH FAULT LVL

1…3

-01: 2 (MEDIUM)

-U1: 1 (LOW)

Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET

3101

NUMBER OF TRIALS

0…5

3102

TRIAL TIME

1.0…600.0 s

0.1 s

30.0 s

3103

DELAY TIME

0.0…120.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

3104

AR OVERCURRENT

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

3105

AR OVERVOLTAGE

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

3106

AR UNDERVOLTAGE

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

3107

AR AI<MIN

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

3108

AR EXTERNAL FLT

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

Group 32: SUPERVISION

3201

SUPERV 1 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

103 (parameter 0103

OUTPUT FREQ)

3202

SUPERV 1 LIM LO

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3201

3203

SUPERV 1 LIM HI

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3201

3204

SUPERV 2 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

104 (parameter 0104

CURRENT)

3205

SUPERV 2 LIM LO

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3204

3206

SUPERV 2 LIM HI

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3204

3207

SUPERV 3 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

105 (parameter 0105

TORQUE)

3208

SUPERV 3 LIM LO

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3207

3209

SUPERV 3 LIM HI

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3207

Group 33: INFORMATION

3301

FIRMWARE

0000…FFFF hex

Firmware version

3302

LOADING PACKAGE

0000…FFFF hex

Type dependent

3303

TEST DATE

yy.ww

0.01

3304

DRIVE RATING

Type dependent

3305

PARAMETER TABLE

0000…FFFF hex

Type dependent

Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY

3401

SIGNAL1 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

103 (parameter 0103

OUTPUT FREQ)

3402

SIGNAL1 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3401

3403

SIGNAL1 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3401

3404

OUTPUT1 DSP FORM

0…9

9 (DIRECT)

3405

OUTPUT1 UNIT

0…127

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3401

3406

OUTPUT1 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3401

3407

OUTPUT1 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3401

3408

SIGNAL2 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

104 (parameter 0104

CURRENT)

3409

SIGNAL2 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3408

3410

SIGNAL2 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3408

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

3411

OUTPUT2 DSP FORM

0…9

9 (DIRECT)

3412

OUTPUT2 UNIT

0…127

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3408

3413

OUTPUT2 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3408

3414

OUTPUT2 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3408

3415

SIGNAL3 PARAM

100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178

105 (parameter 0105

TORQUE)

3416

SIGNAL3 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3415

3417

SIGNAL3 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3415

3418

OUTPUT3 DSP FORM

0…9

9 (DIRECT)

3419

OUTPUT3 UNIT

0…127

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3415

3420

OUTPUT3 MIN

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3415

3421

OUTPUT3 MAX

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 3415

Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

3501

SENSOR TYPE

0…6

0 (NONE)

3502

INPUT SELECTION

1…8

1 (AI1)

3503

ALARM LIMIT

Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C

110 °C / 1500 ohm / 0

Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm

Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1

3504

FAULT LIMIT

Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C

130 °C / 4000 ohm / 0

Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm

Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1

Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS

3601

TIMERS ENABLE

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)

3602

START TIME 1

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3603

STOP TIME 1

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3604

START DAY 1

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3605

STOP DAY 1

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3606

START TIME 2

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3607

STOP TIME 2

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3608

START DAY 2

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3609

STOP DAY 2

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3610

START TIME 3

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3611

STOP TIME 3

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3612

START DAY 3

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3613

STOP DAY 3

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3614

START TIME 4

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3615

STOP TIME 4

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

3616

START DAY 4

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3617

STOP DAY 4

1…7

1 (MONDAY)

3622

BOOSTER SEL

-6…6

0 (NOT SEL)

3623

BOOSTER TIME

00:00:00…23:59:58

2 s

00:00:00

Parameters

100

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

3626

TIMED FUNC 1…4 SRC

0…31

0 (NOT SEL)

…

3629

Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE

3701

USER LOAD C MODE

0…3

0 (NOT SEL)

3702

USER LOAD C FUNC

1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM

1 (FAULT)

3703

USER LOAD C TIME

10…400 s

20 s

3704

LOAD FREQ 1

0…500 Hz

1 Hz

5 Hz

3705

LOAD TORQ LOW 1

0…600%

10%

3706

LOAD TORQ HIGH 1

0…600%

300%

3707

LOAD FREQ 2

0…500 Hz

1 Hz

25 Hz

3708

LOAD TORQ LOW 2

0…600%

15%

3709

LOAD TORQ HIGH 2

0…600%

300%

3710

LOAD FREQ 3

0…500 Hz

1 Hz

43 Hz

3711

LOAD TORQ LOW 3

0…600%

25%

3712

LOAD TORQ HIGH 3

0…600%

300%

3713

LOAD FREQ 4

0…500 Hz

1 Hz

50 Hz

3714

LOAD TORQ LOW 4

0…600%

30%

3715

LOAD TORQ HIGH 4

0…600%

300%

3716

LOAD FREQ 5

0…500 Hz

1 Hz

500 Hz

3717

LOAD TORQ LOW 5

0…600%

30%

3718

LOAD TORQ HIGH 5

0…600%

300%

Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1

4001

GAIN

0.1…100.0

0.1

1.0

4002

INTEGRATION TIME

0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

4003

DERIVATION TIME

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

4004

PID DERIV FILTER

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

1.0 s

4005

ERROR VALUE INV

0 = NO, 1 = YES

0 (NO)

4006

UNITS

0…127

4 (%)

4007

UNIT SCALE

0…4

4008

0% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and

0.0

4007

4009

100% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and

100.0

4007

4010

SET POINT SEL

0…2, 8…17, 19…20

1 (AI1)



4011

INTERNAL SETPNT

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and

40.0

4007

4012

SETPOINT MIN

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

0.0%

4013

SETPOINT MAX

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

100.0%

4014

FBK SEL

1…13

1 (ACT1)

4015

FBK MULTIPLIER

0.000 = NOT SEL, -32.768…32.767

0.001

0.000 (NOT SEL)

4016

ACT1 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4017

ACT2 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4018

ACT1 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

4019

ACT1 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4020

ACT2 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

101

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

4021

ACT2 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4022

SLEEP SELECTION

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)

4023

PID SLEEP LEVEL

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1 rpm

0.0 Hz / 0

rpm

4024

PID SLEEP DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

4025

WAKE-UP DEV

Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and

0.0

4007

4026

WAKE-UP DELAY

0.00…60.00 s

0.01 s

0.50 s

4027

PID 1 PARAM sET

-6…14

0 (SET 1)

Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2

4101

GAIN

0.1…100.0

0.1

1.0

4102

INTEGRATION TIME

0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

4103

DERIVATION TIME

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

4104

PID DERIV FILTER

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

1.0 s

4105

ERROR VALUE INV

0 = NO, 1 = YES

0 (NO)

4106

UNITS

0…127

4 (%)

4107

UNIT SCALE

0…4

4108

0% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and

0.0

4107

4109

100% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and

100.0

4107

4110

SET POINT SEL

0…2, 8…17, 19…20

1 (AI1)



4111

INTERNAL SETPNT

Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and

40.0

4107

4112

SETPOINT MIN

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

0.0%

4113

SETPOINT MAX

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

100.0%

4114

FBK SEL

1…13

1 (ACT1)

4115

FBK MULTIPLIER

0.000 = NOT SEL, -32.768…32.767

0.001

0.000 (NOT SEL)

4116

ACT1 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4117

ACT2 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4118

ACT1 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

4119

ACT1 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4120

ACT2 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

4121

ACT2 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4122

SLEEP SELECTION

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)

4123

PID SLEEP LEVEL

0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm

0.1 Hz / 1 rpm

0.0 Hz / 0 rpm

4124

PID SLEEP DELAY

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

4125

WAKE-UP DEV

Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and

0.0

4107

4126

WAKE-UP DELAY

0.00…60.00 s

0.01 s

0.50 s

Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID

4201

GAIN

0.1…100.0

0.1

1.0

4202

INTEGRATION TIME

0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s

0.1 s

60.0 s

4203

DERIVATION TIME

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

0.0 s

4204

PID DERIV FILTER

0.0…10.0 s

0.1 s

1.0 s

4205

ERROR VALUE INV

0 = NO, 1 = YES

0 (NO)

4206

UNITS

0…127

4 (%)

Parameters

102

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

4207

UNIT SCALE

0…4

4208

0% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

0.0

4207

4209

100% VALUE

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

100.0

4207

4210

SET POINT SEL

0…2, 8…17, 19…20

1 (AI1)



4211

INTERNAL SETPNT

Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and

40.0

4207

4212

SETPOINT MIN

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

0.0%

4213

SETPOINT MAX

-500.0…500.0%

0.1%

100.0%

4214

FBK SEL

1…13

1 (ACT1)

4215

FBK MULTIPLIER

0.000 = NOT SEL, -32.768…32.767

0.001

0.000 (NOT SEL)

4216

ACT1 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4217

ACT2 INPUT

1…7

2 (AI2)



4218

ACT1 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

4219

ACT1 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4220

ACT2 MINIMUM

-1000…1000%

4221

ACT2 MAXIMUM

-1000…1000%

100%

4228

ACTIVATE

-6…12

0 (NOT SEL)

4229

OFFSET

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

4230

TRIM MODE

0 = NOT SEL, 1 = PROPORTIONAL,

0 (NOT SEL)

3 = DIRECT

4231

TRIM SCALE

-100.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

4232

CORRECTION SRC

1 = PID2REF, 2 = PID2OUTPUT

1 (PID2REF)

Group 45: ENERGY SAVING

4502

ENERGY PRICE

0.00…655.35

0.01

0.00

4507

CO2 CONV FACTOR

0.0…10.0 tn/MWh

0.1 tn/MWh

0.5 tn/MWh

4508

PUMP POWER

0.0…1000.0%

0.1%

100.0%

4509

ENERGY RESET

0 = DONE, 1 = RESET

0 (DONE)

Group 50: ENCODER

5001

PULSE NR

50…16384

1024



5002

ENCODER ENABLE

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)



5003

ENCODER FAULT

1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM

1 (FAULT)



5010

Z PLS ENABLE

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)



5011

POSITION RESET

0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE

0 (DISABLE)

Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE

5101

FBA TYPE

0 (NOT DEFINED)

5102 …

FB PAR 2…26

0…65535

5126

5127

FBA PAR REFRESH

0 = DONE, 1 = REFRESH

0 (DONE)



5128

FILE CPI FW REV

0000…FFFF hex

5129

FILE CONFIG ID

0000…FFFF hex

5130

FILE CONFIG REV

0000…FFFF hex

5131

FBA STATUS

0…6

0 (IDLE)

5132

FBA CPI FW REV

0000…FFFF hex

5133

FBA APPL FW REV

0000…FFFF hex

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

103

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

Group 52: PANEL COMM

5201

STATION ID

1…247

5202

BAUD RATE

9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kbits/s

9.6 kbits/s

5203

PARITY

0 = 8 NONE 1, 1 = 8 NONE 2,

0 (8 NONE 1)

2 = 8 EVEN 1, 3 = 8 ODD 1

5204

OK MESSAGES

0…65535

5205

PARITY ERRORS

0…65535

5206

FRAME ERRORS

0…65535

5207

BUFFER OVERRUNS

0…65535

5208

CRC ERRORS

0…65535

Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL

5301

EFB PROTOCOL ID

0…0xFFFF

5302

EFB STATION ID

0…65535



5303

EFB BAUD RATE

1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 76.8

9.6 kbits/s

kbits/s

5304

EFB PARITY

0 = 8 NONE 1, 1 = 8 NONE 2,

0 (8 NONE 1)

2 = 8 EVEN 1, 3 = 8 ODD 1

5305

EFB CTRL PROFILE

0 = ABB DRV LIM, 1 = DCU PROFILE,

0 (ABB DRV LIM)

2 = ABB DRV FULL

5306

EFB OK MESSAGES

0…65535

5307

EFB CRC ERRORS

0…65535

5308

EFB UART ERRORS

0…65535

5309

EFB STATUS

0…7

0 (IDLE)

5310

EFB PAR 10

0…65535

5311

EFB PAR 11

0…65535

5312

EFB PAR 12

0…65535

5313

EFB PAR 13

0…65535

5314

EFB PAR 14

0…65535

5315

EFB PAR 15

0…65535

5316

EFB PAR 16

0…65535

5317

EFB PAR 17

0…65535

5318

EFB PAR 18

0…65535

5319

EFB PAR 19

0000…FFFF hex

5320

EFB PAR 20

0000…FFFF hex

Group 64: LOAD ANALYZER

6401

PVL SIGNAL

100…178

103 (parameter 0103

OUTPUT FREQ)

6402

PVL FILTER TIME

0.0…120.0 s

0.1 s

6403

LOGGERS RESET

-6…7

0 (NOT SEL)

6404

AL2 SIGNAL

101…178

103 (parameter 0103

OUTPUT FREQ)

6405

AL2 SIGNAL BASE

Depends on the signal

selected with par. 6404.

6406

PEAK VALUE

6407

PEAK TIME 1

Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days

1 d

6408

PEAK TIME 2

Time hh.mm.ss

6409

CURRENT AT PEAK

0.0…6553.5 A

0.1 A

Parameters

104

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Name

Range

Resolution

Default

User

6410

UDC AT PEAK

0…65535 V

6411

FREQ AT PEAK

0.0…6553.5 Hz

0.1 Hz

6412

TIME OF RESET 1

Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days

1 d

6413

TIME OF RESET 2

Time hh.mm.ss

6414

AL1RANGE0TO10

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6415

AL1RANGE10TO20

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6416

AL1RANGE20TO30

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6417

AL1RANGE30TO40

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6418

AL1RANGE40TO50

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6419

AL1RANGE50TO60

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6420

AL1RANGE60TO70

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6421

AL1RANGE70TO80

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6422

AL1RANGE80TO90

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6423

AL1RANGE90TO

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6424

AL2RANGE0TO10

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6425

AL2RANGE10TO20

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6426

AL2RANGE20TO30

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6427

AL2RANGE30TO40

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6428

AL2RANGE40TO50

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6429

AL2RANGE50TO60

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6430

AL2RANGE60TO70

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6431

AL2RANGE70TO80

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6432

AL2RANGE80TO90

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

6433

AL2RANGE90TO

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

Group 81: PFC CONTROL

8103

REFERENCE STEP 1

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

8104

REFERENCE STEP 2

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

8105

REFERENCE STEP 3

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

0.0%

8109

START FREQ 1

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 50.0 Hz /

-U1: 60.0 Hz

8110

START FREQ 2

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 50.0 Hz /

-U1: 60.0 Hz

8111

START FREQ 3

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 50.0 Hz /

-U1: 60.0 Hz

8112

LOW FREQ 1

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 25.0 Hz /

-U1: 30.0 Hz

8113

LOW FREQ 2

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 25.0 Hz /

-U1: 30.0 Hz

8114

LOW FREQ 3

0.0…500.0 Hz

0.1 Hz

-01: 25.0 Hz /

-U1: 30.0 Hz

8115

AUX MOT START D

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

5.0 s

8116

AUX MOT STOP D

0.0…3600.0 s

0.1 s

3.0 s

8117

NR OF AUX MOT

0…4



8118

AUTOCHNG INTERV

-0.1 = TEST MODE, 0.0

= NOT SEL,

0.1 h

0.0 h (NOT SEL)



0.1…336.0 h

8119

AUTOCHNG LEVEL

0.0…100.0%

0.1%

50.0%

8120

INTERLOCKS

0…6

4 (DI4)



Parameters

106

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Complete parameter descriptions

This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550.

Group 99: START-UP DATA

This group defines special start-up data required to:

• set up the drive

• enter motor information.

Code

Description

9901

LANGUAGE

Selects the display language. There are two different Assistant Control Panels, each supporting a different language

set. (Panel ACS-CP-L supporting languages 0, 2, 11…15 has been integrated into ACS-CP-A.)

Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-A:

0 = ENGLISH

1 = ENGLISH (AM)

2 = DEUTSCH

3 = ITALIANO

4 = ESPAÑOL

5 = PORTUGUES

6 = NEDERLANDS

7 = FRANÇAIS

8 = DANSK

9 = SUOMI

10 = SVENSKA

11 = RUSSKI

12 = POLSKI

13 = TÜRKÇE

14 = CZECH

15 = MAGYAR

16 = ELLINIKA

Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-D (Asia):

0 = ENGLISH

1 = CHINESE

2 = KOREAN

3 = JAPANESE

9902

APPLIC MACRO

Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a

particular application.

1 = ABB STANDARD

2 = 3-WIRE

3 = ALTERNATE

4 = MOTOR POT

5 = HAND/AUTO

6 = PID CONTROL

7 = PFC CONTROL

8 = TORQUE CTRL

31 = LOAD FD SET

0 = USER S1 LOAD

-1 = USER S1 SAVE

-2 = USER S2 LOAD

-3 = USER S2 SAVE

31 = LOAD FD SET - FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file. Parameter view is selected by

parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW.

• FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy

customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01

FlashDrop User’s Manual (3AFE68591074 [English]).

-1 = USER S1 SAVE, -3 = USER S2 SAVE - With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the

drive permanent memory for later use. Each set contains parameter settings, including Group 99: START-UP

DATA, and the results of the motor identification run.

0 = USER S1 LOAD, -2 = USER S2 LOAD - With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use.

9904

MOTOR CTRL MODE

Selects the motor control mode.

1 = VECTOR:SPEED - sensorless vector control mode.

• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.

• Reference 2 is speed reference in % (100% is absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of parameter 2002

MAXIMUM SPEED, or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum

speed).

2 = VECTOR:TORQ.

• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.

• Reference 2 is torque reference in % (100% is nominal torque.)

3 = SCALAR:FREQ - scalar control mode.

• Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz.

• Reference 2 is frequency reference in % (100% is absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of parameter

2008 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the

maximum speed).

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

107

Code

Description

9905

MOTOR NOM VOLT

Defines the nominal motor voltage.

• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.

Output voltage

• The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input

power (mains) voltage.

9906

MOTOR NOM CURR

P 9905

Defines the nominal motor current.

• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.

• Range allowed: 0.2…2.0 · I_2hd (where I_2hd is drive current).

Output

frequency

9907

MOTOR NOM FREQ

Defines the nominal motor frequency.

P 9907

• Range: 10…500 Hz (typically 50 or 60 Hz)

• Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT.

• Field weakening point = Nom Freq · Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt

9908

MOTOR NOM SPEED

Defines the nominal motor speed.

• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.

9909

MOTOR NOM POWER

Defines the nominal motor power.

• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.

9910

ID RUN

This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the Motor ID Run. During this process, the drive operates

the motor (motor rotating) and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model

used for internal calculations. An ID Run is especially effective when:

• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)], and/or

• operation point is near zero speed, and/or

• operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without any

measured speed feedback (i.e. without a pulse encoder).

0 = OFF/IDMAGN - The Motor ID Run process is not run. Identification magnetization is performed, depending on

parameter 9904 and 2101 settings. In identification magnetization, the motor model is calculated at first start by

magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating). The model is recalculated always at start

after motor parameter changes.

• Parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ): Identification magnetization is performed.

• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or 5 (FLY + BOOST): Identification

magnetization is performed.

• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or 5 (FLY +

BOOST): Identification magnetization is not performed.

1 = ON - Enables the Motor ID Run, during which the motor is rotating, at the next start command. After run

completion, this value automatically changes to 0.

Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.

Note: If motor parameters are changed after ID Run, repeat the ID Run.

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. The

motor will rotate in the forward direction.

Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run!

See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 45.

9915

MOTOR COSPHI

Defines the nominal motor cos phi (power factor). The parameter improves performance especially with high

efficiency motors.

0 = IDENTIFIED - Drive identifies the cos phi automatically by estimation.

0.01…0.97 - Value entered used as the cos phi.

Parameters

108

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 01: OPERATING DATA

This group contains drive operating data, including actual signals. The drive sets the

values for actual signals, based on measurements or calculations. You cannot set

these values.

Code

Description

0101

SPEED & DIR

The calculated signed speed of the motor (rpm). The absolute value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is the same as the value of

0102 SPEED.

• The value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction.

• The value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction.

0102

SPEED

The calculated speed of the motor (rpm). (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output

mode.)

0103

OUTPUT FREQ

The frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output

mode.)

0104

CURRENT

The motor current, as measured by the ACS550. (Shown by default in the control panel Output mode.)

0105

TORQUE

Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of motor nominal torque. (Shown by default in the

control panel Output mode.)

0106

POWER

The measured motor power in kW.

0107

DC BUS VOLTAGE

The DC bus voltage in V DC, as measured by the ACS550.

0109

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

The voltage applied to the motor.

0110

DRIVE TEMP

The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius.

0111

EXTERNAL REF 1

External reference, REF1, in rpm or Hz - units determined by parameter 9904.

0112

EXTERNAL REF 2

External reference, REF2, in %.

0113

CTRL LOCATION

Active control location. Alternatives are:

0 = LOCAL

1 = EXT1

2 = EXT2

0114

RUN TIME (R)

The drive’s accumulated running time in hours (h).

• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.

0115

KWH COUNTER (R)

The drive’s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.

• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.

0116

APPL BLK OUTPUT

Application block output signal. Value is from either:

• PFC control, if PFC Control is active, or

• Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

109

Code

Description

0118

DI 1-3 STATUS

Status of the three digital inputs.

• Status is displayed as a binary number.

•

1 indicates that the input is activated.

•

0 indicates that the input is deactivated.

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

0119

DI 4-6 STATUS

Status of the three digital inputs.

• See parameter 0118 DI 1-3 STATUS.

0120

AI 1

The relative value of analog input 1 in %.

0121

AI 2

The relative value of analog input 2 in %.

0122

RO 1-3 STATUS

Status of the three relay outputs.

•

1 indicates that the relay is energized.

•

0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.

0123

RO 4-6 STATUS

RELAY 1 STATUS

Status of the three relay outputs. Available if OREL-01 Relay Output

RELAY 2 STATUS

Extension Module is installed.

RELAY 3 STATUS

• See parameter 0122.

0124

AO 1

The analog output 1 value in milliamperes.

0125

AO 2

The analog output 2 value in milliamperes.

0126

PID 1 OUTPUT

The PID controller 1 output value in %.

0127

PID 2 OUTPUT

The PID controller 2 output value in %.

0128

PID 1 SETPNT

The PID 1 controller setpoint signal.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0129

PID 2 SETPNT

The PID 2 controller setpoint signal.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0130

PID 1 FBK

The PID 1 controller feedback signal.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0131

PID 2 FBK

The PID 2 controller feedback signal.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0132

PID 1 DEVIATION

The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0133

PID 2 DEVIATION

The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.

0134

COMM RO WORD

Free data location that can be written from serial link.

• Used for relay output control.

• See parameter 1401.

0135

COMM VALUE 1

Free data location that can be written from serial link.

Parameters

110

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

0136

COMM VALUE 2

Free data location that can be written from serial link.

0137

PROCESS VAR 1

Process variable 1

• Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.

0138

PROCESS VAR 2

Process variable 2

• Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.

0139

PROCESS VAR 3

Process variable 3

• Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.

0140

RUN TIME

The drive’s accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).

• Cannot be reset.

0141

MWH COUNTER

The drive’s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.

• Cannot be reset.

0142

REVOLUTION CNTR

The motor’s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.

• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.

0143

DRIVE ON TIME HI

The drive’s accumulated power-on time in days.

• Cannot be reset.

0144

DRIVE ON TIME LO

The drive’s accumulated power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60 seconds).

• Shown in format hh.mm.ss.

• Cannot be reset.

0145

MOTOR TEMP

Motor temperature in degrees Celsius / PTC resistance in ohms.

• Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up.

• See parameter 3501.

0146

MECH ANGLE

Defines the motor shaft’s angular position to about 0.01° (32,768 divisions for 360°). The position is defined as 0 at

power up.

During operation the zero position can be set by:

• a Z-pulse input, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE)

• parameter 5011 POSITION RESET, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 2 (DISABLE)

• any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE.

0147

MECH REVS

A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft. The value:

• increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0

• decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767.

0148

Z PLS DETECTED

Encoder zero pulse detector. When a Z-pulse defines the zero position, the shaft must pass through the zero position

to trigger a Z-pulse. Until then, the shaft position is unknown (the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero).

This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid. The parameter starts at 0 = NOT DETECTED on

power-up and changes to 1 = DETECTED only if:

• parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE) and

• an encoder Z-pulse has been detected.

0150

CB TEMP

Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius.

Note: Some drives have a control board (OMIO) that does not support this feature. These drives always show the

constant value of 25.0 °C.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

111

Code

Description

0153

MOT THERM STRESS

Estimated rise of the motor temperature. Value equals to the estimated motor thermal stress as a percentage of the

motor temperature trip level.

0158

PID COMM VALUE 1

Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).

0159

PID COMM VALUE 2

Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).

0174

SAVED KWH

Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note

on page 180.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0

and the counter value of signal 0175 is incremented by one. Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET

(resets all energy calculators at the same time).

• See Group 45: ENERGY SAVING.

0175

SAVED MWH

Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note

on page 180.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.

• Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy calculators at the same time).

• See Group 45: ENERGY SAVING.

0176

SAVED AMOUNT 1

Energy saved in local currency (remainder when the total saved energy is divided by 1000). See the note on page

180.

• To find out the total saved energy in currency units, add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the

value of parameter 0176.

Example:

0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 = 123.4

0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 = 5

Total saved energy = 5 · 1000 + 123.4 = 5123.4 currency units.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0

and the counter value of signal 0177 is incremented by one.

• Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy calculators at the same time).

• Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE.

• See Group 45: ENERGY SAVING.

0177

SAVED AMOUNT 2

Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units. Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units. See the note on

page 180.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 (the counter does not roll over).

• See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1.

0178

SAVED CO2

Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn. See the note on page 180.

• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553.5 (the counter does not roll over).

• Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy calculators at the same time).

• CO2 conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR.

• See Group 45: ENERGY SAVING.

Parameters

112

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

This group monitors fieldbus communications.

Code

Description

0301

FB CMD WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Fieldbus

Bit #

0301, FB CMD WORD 1

0302, FB CMD WORD 2

Command Word 1.

STOP

FBLOCAL_CTL

• The fieldbus command is the principal

means for controlling the drive from a

START

FBLOCAL_REF

fieldbus controller. The command

REVERSE

START_DISABLE1

consists of two Command Words. Bit-

LOCAL

START_DISABLE2

coded instructions in the Command

Words switch the drive between

RESET

Reserved

states.

EXT2

Reserved

• To control the drive, using the

Command Words, an external location

RUN_DISABLE

Reserved

(EXT1 or EXT2) must be active and set

STPMODE_R

Reserved

to COMM. (See parameters 1001 and

STPMODE_EM

Reserved

1002.)

• The control panel displays the word in

STPMODE_C

Reserved

hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in

RAMP_2

Reserved

Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a

1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.

RAMP_OUT_0

REF_CONST

0302

FB CMD WORD 2

RAMP_HOLD

REF_AVE

Read-only copy of the Fieldbus

RAMP_IN_0

LINK_ON

Command Word 2.

RREQ_LOCALLOC

REQ_STARTINH

• See parameter 0301.

TORQLIM2

OFF_INTERLOCK

0303

FB STS WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Status Word 1.

Bit #

0303, FB STS WORD 1

0304, FB STS WORD 2

• The drive sends status information to

READY

ALARM

the fieldbus controller. The status

consists of two Status Words.

ENABLED

NOTICE

• The control panel displays the word in

STARTED

DIRLOCK

hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in

RUNNING

LOCALLOCK

Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a

1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.

ZERO_SPEED

CTL_MODE

0304

FB STS WORD 2

ACCELERATE

Reserved

Read-only copy of the Status Word 2.

DECELERATE

Reserved

• See parameter 0303.

AT_SETPOINT

CPY_CTL

LIMIT

CPY_REF1

SUPERVISION

CPY_REF2

REV_REF

REQ_CTL

REV_ACT

REQ_REF1

PANEL_LOCAL

REQ_REF2

FIELDBUS_LOCAL

REQ_REF2EXT

EXT2_ACT

ACK_STARTINH

FAULT

ACK_OFF_ILCK

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

113

Code

Description

0305

FAULT WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1.

Bit #

0305, FAULT WORD 1

0306, FAULT WORD 2

0307, FAULT WORD 3

• When a fault is active, the

OVERCURRENT

Obsolete

EFB 1

corresponding bit for the active fault is

set in the Fault Words.

DC OVERVOLT

THERM FAIL

EFB 2

• Each fault has a dedicated bit

DEV OVERTEMP

OPEX LINK

EFB 3

allocated within Fault Words.

SHORT CIRC

OPEX PWR

INCOMPATIBLE SW

• See section Fault listing on page 260

for a description of the faults.

Reserved

CURR MEAS

USER LOAD CURVE

• The control panel displays the word in

DC UNDERVOLT

SUPPLY PHASE

Reserved

hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in

Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a

AI1 LOSS

ENCODER ERR

Reserved

1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.

AI2 LOSS

OVERSPEED

Reserved

0306

FAULT WORD 2

MOT OVERTEMP

Reserved

Read-only copy of the Fault Word 2.

PANEL LOSS

DRIVE ID

Reserved

• See parameter 0305.

ID RUN FAIL

CONFIG FILE

System error

0307

FAULT WORD 3

MOTOR STALL

SERIAL 1 ERR

System error

Read-only copy of the Fault Word 3.

• See parameter 0305.

CB OVERTEMP

EFB CON FILE

System error

EXT FAULT 1

FORCE TRIP

System error

EXT FAULT 2

MOTOR PHASE

System error

EARTH FAULT

OUTP WIRING

Param. setting fault

0308

ALARM WORD 1

• When an alarm is active, the

Bit #

0308, ALARM WORD 1

0309, ALARM WORD 2

corresponding bit for the active alarm

OVERCURRENT

Reserved

is set in the Alarm Words.

• Each alarm has a dedicated bit

OVERVOLTAGE

PID SLEEP

allocated within Alarm Words.

UNDERVOLTAGE

ID RUN

• Bits remain set until the whole alarm

word is reset. (Reset by writing zero to

DIR LOCK

Reserved

the word.)

IO COMM

START ENABLE 1 MISSING

• The control panel displays the word in

AI1 LOSS

START ENABLE 2 MISSING

hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in

Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a

AI2 LOSS

EMERGENCY STOP

1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.

PANEL LOSS

ENCODER ERROR

0309

ALARM WORD 2

DEVICE OVERTEMP

FIRST START

See parameter 0308.

MOTOR TEMP

Reserved

USER LOAD CURVE

MOTOR STALL

START DELAY

AUTORESET

Reserved

AUTOCHANGE

Reserved

PFC I LOCK

Reserved

Parameters

114

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 04: FAULT HISTORY

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive.

Code

Description

0401

LAST FAULT

0 - Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).

n - Fault code of the last recorded fault. The fault code is displayed as a name. See section Fault listing on page 260

for the fault codes and names. The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding

name in the fault listing, which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display.

0402

FAULT TIME 1

The day on which the last fault occurred. Either as:

• A date - if real time clock is operating.

• The number of days after power on - if real time clock is not used, or was not set.

0403

FAULT TIME 2

The time at which the last fault occurred. Either as:

• Real time, in format hh:mm:ss - if real time clock is operating.

• The time since power on (minus the whole days reported in 0402), in format hh:mm:ss - if real time clock is not

used, or was not set.

• Format on the Basic Control Panel: The time since power on in 2-second ticks (minus the whole days reported in

0402). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. E.g. Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514/30).

0404

SPEED AT FLT

The motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred.

0405

FREQ AT FLT

The frequency (Hz) at the time the last fault occurred.

0406

VOLTAGE AT FLT

The DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred.

0407

CURRENT AT FLT

The motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred.

0408

TORQUE AT FLT

The motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred.

0409

STATUS AT FLT

The drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred.

0410

DI 1-3 AT FLT

The status of digital inputs 1…3 at the time the last fault occurred.

0411

DI 4-6 AT FLT

The status of digital inputs 4…6 at the time the last fault occurred.

0412

PREVIOUS FAULT 1

Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.

0413

PREVIOUS FAULT 2

Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

115

Group 10: START/STOP/DIR

This group:

• defines external sources (EXT1 and EXT2) for commands that enable start, stop

and direction changes

• locks direction or enables direction control.

To select between the two external locations use the next group (parameter 1102).

Code

Description

1001

EXT1 COMMANDS

Defines external control location 1 (EXT1) - the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.

0 = NOT SEL - No external start, stop and direction command source.

1 = DI1 - Two-wire Start/Stop.

• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).

• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD).

2 = DI1,2 - Two-wire Start/Stop, Direction.

• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).

• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI2

(DI2 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).

3 = DI1P,2P - Three-wire Start/Stop.

• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”).

• Start is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital

input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.

• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.

• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI2.

• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.

• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD).

4 = DI1P,2P,3 - Three-wire Start/Stop, Direction.

• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as described for DI1P,2P.

• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI3

(DI3 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).

5 = DI1P,2P,3P - Start Forward, Start Reverse and Stop.

• Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands

for “pulse”).

• Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the

drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.

• Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI2. In order to start

the drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2.

• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.

• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI3.

• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.

• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).

6 = DI6 - Two-wire Start/Stop.

• Start/Stop is through digital input DI6 (DI6 activated = Start; DI6 de-activated = Stop).

• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD).

7 = DI6,5 - Two-wire Start/Stop/Direction.

• Start/Stop is through digital input DI6 (DI6 activated = Start; DI6 de-activated = Stop).

• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI5.

(DI5 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).

8 = KEYPAD - Control Panel.

• Start/Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active.

• Direction control requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).

9 = DI1F,2R - Start/Stop/Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations.

• Start forward = DI1 activated and DI2 de-activated.

• Start reverse = DI1 de-activated and DI2 activated.

• Stop = both DI1 and DI2 activated, or both de-activated.

• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).

10 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start/stop and direction commands.

• Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the start/stop and direction commands.

• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.

Parameters

116

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

11 = TIMED FUNC 1. - Assigns Start/Stop control to Timed Function 1 (Timed Function activated = START; Timed

Function de-activated = STOP). See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

12…14 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 - Assigns Start/Stop control to Timed Function 2…4. See TIMED FUNC 1 above.

1002

EXT2 COMMANDS

Defines external control location 2 (EXT2) - the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.

• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above.

1003

DIRECTION

Defines the control of motor rotation direction.

1 = FORWARD - Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.

2 = REVERSE - Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.

3 = REQUEST - Rotation direction can be changed on command.

1004

JOGGING SEL

Defines the signal that activates the jogging function. Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 (parameter 1208) for speed

reference and ramp pair 2 (parameters 2205 and 2206) for accelerating and decelerating. When the jogging

activation signal is lost, the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed, even if coast stop is used in normal

operation (parameter 2102). The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs (parameter 1401). The jogging

status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the jogging function.

1 = DI1 - Activates/de-activates jogging based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = jogging active; DI1 de-activated =

jogging inactive).

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = jogging inactive; DI1 de-activated = jogging

active).

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1(INV) above.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

117

Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT

This group defines:

• how the drive selects between command sources

• characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2.

Code

Description

1101

KEYPAD REF SEL

Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.

1 = REF1(Hz/rpm) - Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.

• Speed reference (rpm) if 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:sPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).

• Frequency reference (Hz) if 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).

2 = REF2(%)

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source for

Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference signals.

0 = EXT1 - Selects external control location 1 (EXT1).

• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.

• See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1’s reference definitions.

1 = DI1 - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT2; DI1 de-activated = EXT1).

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.

7 = EXT2 - Selects external control location 2 (EXT2).

• See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.

• See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2’s reference definitions.

8 = COMM - Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word.

• Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).

• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.

9 = TIMED FUNC 1 - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function (Timed Function

activated = EXT2; Timed Function de-activated = EXT1). See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

10…12 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function. See TIMED

FUNC 1 above.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT1; DI1 de-activated =

EXT2).

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See

DI1(INV) above.

1103

REF1 SELECT

EXT REF 1 MAX

Selects the signal source for external reference REF1.

0 = KEYPAD - Defines the control panel as the reference

source.

EXT REF 1 MIN

1 = AI1 - Defines analog input 1 (AI1) as the reference

source.

2 = AI2 - Defines analog input 2 (AI2) as the reference

- EXT REF 1 MIN

source.

10 V /

3 = AI1/JOYST - Defines analog input 1 (AI1), configured for

20 mA

joystick operation, as the reference source.

- EXT REF 1 MAX

• The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum

2 V / 4 mA

reference in the reverse direction. Define the minimum

0 V / 0 mA

using parameter 1104.

EXT REF 1 MIN

-2%

+2%

• The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum

reference in the forward direction. Define the maximum

- EXT REF 1 MIN

using parameter 1105.

Hysteresis 4% of full scale

• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).

WARNING! Because the low end of the reference

range commands full reverse operation, do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range. Doing so

means that if the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V input) the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use

the following set-up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault, stopping the drive:

• Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 (1304 MINIMUM AI2) at 20% (2 V or 4 mA).

• Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or higher.

• Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT).

4 = AI2/JOYST - Defines analog input 2 (AI2), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.

• See above (AI1/JOYST) description.

Parameters

118

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

5 = DI3U,4D(R) - Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source (motor potentiometer control).

• Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”).

• Digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”).

• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for “reset”).

• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.

6 = DI3U,4D - Same as above (DI3U,4D(R)), except:

• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.

• When the drive restarts, the motor ramps up (at the selected acceleration rate) to the stored reference.

7 = DI5U,6D - Same as above (DI3U,4D), except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used.

8 = COMM - Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.

9 = COMM+AI1 - Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input

reference correction below.

10 = COMM

*AI1 - Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input

reference correction below.

11 = DI3U,4D(RNC) - Same as DI3U,4D(R) above, except that:

• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.

12 = DI3U,4D(NC) - Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:

• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.

• Stop command resets reference to zero.

13 = DI5U,6D(NC) - Same as DI5U,6D above, except that:

• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.

14 = AI1+AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

15 = AI1*AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

16 = AI1-AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

17 = AI1/AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

20 = KEYPAD(RNC) - Defines the control panel as the reference source.

• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for reset.).

• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the reference.

21 = KEYPAD(NC) - Defines the control panel as the reference source.

• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.

• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the reference.

Analog input reference correction

Parameter values 9, 10 and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.

Value setting

Calculation of the AI reference

C + B

C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)

C * B

C value · (B value / 50% of reference value)

C - B

(C value + 50% of reference value) - B value

C / B

(C value · 50% of reference value) / B value

Where:

• C = Main reference value

120

( = COMM for values 9, 10 and

17 (/)

= AI1 for values 14…17).

100

• B = Correcting reference

( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and

= AI2 for values 14…17).

9, 14 (+)

Example:

The figure shows the reference source curves for value

10, 15 (*)

settings 9, 10 and 14…17, where:

• C = 25%.

• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.

16 (-)

• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.

100% B

• B varies along the horizontal axis.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

119

Code

Description

1104

REF1 MIN

Ext ref

Sets the minimum for external reference 1.

• The minimum analog input signal (as a percent of the full

signal in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF1 MIN in

P 1105

Hz/rpm.

(MAX)

• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets

the minimum analog input signal.

• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max.

settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the

reference.

P 1104

Analog

(MIN)

input signal

1105

REF1 MAX

Sets the maximum for external reference 1.

P 1301

P 1302

• The maximum analog input signal (as a percent of full

or 1304

or 1305

the signal in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF1 MAX

in Hz/rpm.

Ext ref

• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets

the maximum analog input signal.

P 1104

(MIN)

P 1105

(MAX)

Analog

P 1301

P 1302

input signal

or 1304

or 1305

1106

REF2 SELECT

Selects the signal source for external reference REF2.

0…17 - Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.

19 = PID1OUT - The reference is taken from the PID1 output. See Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41:

PROCESS PID SET 2.

20…21 - Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.

If PFC is used

19=PID1

REF2

LIMIT

SELECT

PFC

MAX (1107, 1108)

1…17

20…21

MIN (1107, 1108)

1107

REF2 MIN

Sets the minimum for external reference 2.

• The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF2 MIN in %.

• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal.

• This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.

• The value is a percentage of the:

- maximum frequency or speed

- maximum process reference

- nominal torque.

1108

REF2 MAX

Sets the maximum for external reference 2.

• The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF2 MAX in %.

• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal.

• This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.

• The value is a percentage of the:

- maximum frequency or speed

- maximum process reference

– nominal torque.

Parameters

120

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:

• You can program up to 7 constant speeds, ranging from 0…500 Hz or

0…30000 rpm.

• Values must be positive (No negative speed values for constant speeds).

• Constant speed selections are ignored if:

- the torque control is active, or

- the process PID reference is followed, or

- the drive is in local control mode, or

- PFC (Pump-Fan Control) is active.

Note: Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called fault speed which

may be activated if the control signal is lost. For example, see parameters 3001

AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.

Code

Description

1201

CONST SPEED SEL

Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds. See general comments in introduction.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the constant speed function.

1 = DI1 - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.

• Digital input activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2…DI6. See above.

7 = DI1,2 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.

• Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):

DI1

DI2

Function

No constant speed

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

• Can be set up as a so-called fault speed, which is activated if the control signal is lost. Refer to parameter 3001

AI<MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.

8 = DI2,3 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI2 and DI3.

• See above (DI1,2) for code.

9 = DI3,4 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI3 and DI4.

• See above (DI1,2) for code.

10 = DI4,5 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI4 and DI5.

• See above (DI1,2) for code.

11 = DI5,6 - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI5 and DI6.

• See above (DI1,2) for code.

12 = DI1,2,3 - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.

• Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):

DI1

DI2

DI3

Function

No constant speed

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

Constant speed 4 (1205)

Constant speed 5 (1206)

Constant speed 6 (1207)

Constant speed 7 (1208)

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

121

Code

Description

13 = DI3,4,5 - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI3, DI4 and DI5.

• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.

14 = DI4,5,6 - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI4, DI5 and DI6.

• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.

15…18 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 - Selects Constant Speed 1, Constant Speed 2 or the external reference, depending on

the state of the Timed Function (1…4) and constant speed mode. See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group

36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

19 = TIMED FUN1&2 - Selects a constant speed or the external reference, depending on the state of Timed Functions

1 & 2 and constant speed mode. See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.

• Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.

-2…- 6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input. See above.

-7 = DI1,2(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.

• Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):

DI1

DI2

Function

No constant speed

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

-8 = DI2,3(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI2 and DI3.

• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.

-9 = DI3,4(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI3 and DI4.

• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.

-10 = DI4,5(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI4 and DI5.

• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.

-11 = DI5,6(INV) - Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI5 and DI6.

• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.

-12 = DI1,2,3(INV) - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.

• Inverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):

DI1

DI2

DI3

Function

No constant speed

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

Constant speed 4 (1205)

Constant speed 5 (1206)

Constant speed 6 (1207)

Constant speed 7 (1208)

-13 = DI3,4,5(INV) - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI3, DI4 and DI5.

• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.

-14 = DI4,5,6(INV) - Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI4, DI5 and DI6.

• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.

1202

CONST SPEED 1

Sets value for Constant Speed 1.

• The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.

• Range: 0…30000 rpm when 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).

• Range: 0…500 Hz when 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).

1203

CONST SPEED 2…CONST SPEED 7

…

Each sets a value for a Constant Speed. See CONST SPEED 1 above.

1208

Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed. See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL.

Parameters

122

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

1209

TIMED MODE SEL

Defines timed function activated constant speed mode. Timed function can be used to change between the external

reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4) or 19 (TIMED

FUN1&2).

1 = EXT/CS1/2/3

• If parameter 1201 = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4), selects an external speed when this timed function (1…4) is not

active and selects Constant speed 1 when it is active.

TIMED FUNCTION 1…4

Function

External reference

Constant speed 1 (1202)

• If parameter 1201 = 19 (TIMED FUN1&2), selects an external speed when neither timed function is active, selects

Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active, selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is

active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active.

TIMED FUNCTION 1

TIMED FUNCTION 2

Function

External reference

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

2 = CS1/2/3/4

• If parameter 1201 = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4), selects Constant speed 1 when this timed function (1…4) is not

active and selects Constant speed 2 when it is active.

TIMED FUNCTION 1…4

Function

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

• If parameter 1201 = 19 (TIMED FUN1&2), selects Constant speed 1 when neither timed function is active, selects

Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active, selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is

active and selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active.

TIMED FUNCTION 1

TIMED FUNCTION 2

Function

Constant speed 1 (1202)

Constant speed 2 (1203)

Constant speed 3 (1204)

Constant speed 4 (1205)

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

123

Group 13: ANALOG INPUTS

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs.

Code

Description

1301

MINIMUM AI1

Defines the minimum value of the analog input.

• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range. See example below.

• The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN.

• MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM AI.

• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the

reference.

• See the figure at parameter 1104.

Example: To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:

• Configure the analog input for 0…20 mA current signal.

• Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percent of full range (20 mA) = 4 mA / 20 mA · 100% = 20%

1302

MAXIMUM AI1

Defines the maximum value of the analog input.

• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range.

• The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX.

• See the figure at parameter 1104.

1303

FILTER AI1

Unfiltered signal

Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (AI1).

• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time

specified.

100

Filtered signal

Time constant

1304

MINIMUM AI2

Defines the minimum value of the analog input.

• See MINIMUM AI1 above.

1305

MAXIMUM AI2

Defines the maximum value of the analog input.

• See MAXIMUM AI1 above.

1306

FILTER AI2

Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (AI2).

• See FILTER AI1 above.

Parameters

124

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs. Relay

outputs 4…6 are only available if OREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module is

installed.

Code

Description

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 - what relay output 1 means.

0 = NOT SEL - Relay is not used and is de-energized.

1 = READY - Energize relay when drive is ready to function. Requires:

• Run enable signal present.

• No faults exist.

• Supply voltage is within range.

• Emergency Stop command is not on.

2 = RUN - Energize relay when the drive is running.

3 = FAULT(-1) - Energize relay when power is applied. De-energizes when a fault occurs.

4 = FAULT - Energize relay when a fault is active.

5 = ALARM - Energize relay when an alarm is active.

6 = REVERSED - Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction.

7 = STARTED - Energize relay when drive receives a start command (even if Run Enable signal is not present). De-

energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.

8= SUPRV1 OVER - Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

9 = SUPRV1 UNDER - Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) drops below the limit (3202).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

10 = SUPRV2 OVER - Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) exceeds the limit (3206).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

11 = SUPRV2 UNDER - Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) drops below the limit (3205).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

12 = SUPRV3 OVER - Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) exceeds the limit (3209).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

13 = SUPRV3 UNDER - Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) drops below the limit (3208).

• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.

14 = AT SET POINT - Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency.

15 = FAULT(RST) - Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto-reset

delay.

• See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.

16 = FLT/ALARM - Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs.

17 = EXT CTRL - Energize relay when external control is selected.

18 = REF 2 SEL - Energize relay when EXT2 is selected.

19 = CONST FREQ - Energize relay when a constant speed is selected.

20 = REF LOSS - Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost.

21 = OVERCURRENT - Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs.

22 = OVERVOLTAGE - Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs.

23 = DRIVE TEMP - Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.

24 = UNDERVOLTAGE - Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs.

25 = AI1 LOSS - Energize relay when AI1 signal is lost.

26 = AI2 LOSS - Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost.

27 = MOTOR TEMP - Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.

28 = STALL - Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists.

30 = PID SLEEP - Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active.

31 = PFC - Use relay to start/stop motor in PFC control (See Group 81: PFC CONTROL).

• Use this option only when PFC control is used.

• Selection activated / deactivated when drive is not running.

32 = AUTOCHANGE - Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed.

• Use this option only when PFC control is used.

33 = FLUX READY - Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque (motor has

reached nominal magnetizing).

34 = USER MACRO 2 - Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

125

Code

Description

35 = COMM - Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.

• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:

Par. 0134

Binary

RO6

RO5

RO4

RO3

RO2

RO1

000000

000001

000010

000011

000100

5…62

…

111111

• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

36 = COMM(-1) - Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.

• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:

Par. 0134

Binary

RO6

RO5

RO4

RO3

RO2

RO1

000000

000001

000010

000011

000100

5…62

…

111111

• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

37 = TIMED FUNC 1 - Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active. See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

38…40 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 - Energize relay when Timed Function 2…4 is active. See TIMED FUNC 1 above.

41 = MNT TRIG FAN - Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.

42 = MNT TRIG REV - Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.

43 = MNT TRIG RUN - Energize relay when run time counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.

44 = MNT TRIG MWH - Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.

46 = START DELAY - Energize relay when a start delay is active.

47 = USER LOAD C - Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs.

52 = JOG ACTIVE - Energize relay when the jogging function is active.

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 - what relay output 2 means.

• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 - what relay output 3 means.

• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.

1404

RO 1 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 1.

Control event

• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.

1405

RO 1 OFF DELAY

Relay status

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 1.

• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.

1404 ON DELAY

1405 OFF DELAY

1406

RO 2 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.

• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

1407

RO 2 OFF DELAY

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 2.

• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

1408

RO 3 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 3.

• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

Parameters

126

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

1409

RO 3 OFF DELAY

Switch-off delay for relay 3.

• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

1410

RELAY OUTPUT 4…6

…

Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 - what relay output 4…6 means. Available if OREL-01 Relay

1412

Output Extension Module is installed.

• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.

1413

RO 4 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 4.

• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

1414

RO 4 OFF DELAY

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 4.

• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

1415

RO 5 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 5.

• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

1416

RO 5 OFF DELAY

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 5.

• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

1417

RO 6 ON DELAY

Defines the switch-on delay for relay 6.

• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

1418

RO 6 OFF DELAY

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 6.

• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

127

Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS

This group defines the drive’s analog (current signal) outputs. The drive’s analog

outputs can be:

• any parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA

• limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current

• scaled (and/or inverted) by defining the minimum and maximum values of the

source parameter (or content). Defining an maximum value (parameter 1503 or

1509) that is less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or 1508)

results in an inverted output.

• filtered.

Code

Description

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

Defines the content for analog output AO1.

99 = EXCITE PTC - Provides a current source for sensor type PTC. Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR TEMP

MEAS.

100 = EXCITE PT100 - Provides a current source for sensor type PT100. Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR

TEMP MEAS.

101…178 - Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA.

• Parameter defined by value (value 102 = parameter 0102)

1502

AO1 CONTENT MIN

AO (mA)

Sets the minimum content value.

P 1505 /

• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.

P 1511

• Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be

converted to an analog output.

• These parameters (content and current min. and max. settings)

provide scale and offset adjustment for the output. See the

figure.

P 1504 /

P 1510

AO CONTENT

1503

AO1 CONTENT MAX

Sets the maximum content value

P 1502 / 1508

P 1503 / 1509

• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.

AO (mA)

• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will

P 1505 /

be converted to an analog output.

P 1511

1504

MINIMUM AO1

Sets the minimum output current.

1505

MAXIMUM AO1

Sets the maximum output current.

P 1504 /

1506

FILTER AO1

P 1510

Defines the filter time constant for AO1.

AO CONTENT

• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time

P 1502 / 1508

specified.

P 1503 / 1509

• See the figure in parameter 1303.

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT SEL above.

1508

AO2 CONTENT MIN

Sets the minimum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MIN above.

1509

AO2 CONTENT MAX

Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.

1510

MINIMUM AO2

Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

129

Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS

This group defines a variety of system level locks, resets and enables.

Code

Description

1601

RUN ENABLE

Selects the source of the run enable signal.

0 = NOT SEL - Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.

• This digital input must be activated for run enable.

• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable

signal resumes.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal.

• Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the run disable signal.

• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.

• This digital input must be de-activated for run enable.

• If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.

• See DI1(INV) above.

1602

PARAMETER LOCK

Determines if the control panel can change parameter values.

• This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.

• This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs.

• This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered. See parameter 1603 PASS CODE.

0 = LOCKED - You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values.

• The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603.

1 = OPEN - You can use the control panel to change parameter values.

2 = NOT SAVED - You can use the control panel to change parameter values, but they are not stored in permanent

memory.

• Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE) to store changed parameter values to memory.

1603

PASS CODE

Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock.

• See parameter 1602 above.

• The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once.

• This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.

1604

FAULT RESET SEL

Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no

longer exists.

0 = KEYPAD - Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.

• Fault reset is always possible with control panel.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.

• Activating the digital input resets the drive.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.

• See DI1 above.

7 = START/STOP - Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.

• Do not use this option when fieldbus communication provides the start, stop and direction commands.

8 = COMM - Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.

• De-activating the digital input resets the drive.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.

• See DI1(INV) above.

Parameters

130

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

1605

USER PAR SET CHG

Defines control for changing the user parameter set.

• See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO.

• The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.

• During a change, the drive will not start.

Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings, or performing a motor

identification.

• Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed, the drive loads the last settings

saved. Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost.

Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User Parameter Sets, and it does not change if User

Parameter Sets change.

Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2.

• See parameter 1401.

0 = NOT SEL - Defines the control panel (using parameter 9902) as the only control for changing User Parameter

Sets.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.

• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input.

• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input.

• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.

• See DI1 above.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.

• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input.

• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input.

• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.

• See DI1(INV) above.

1606

LOCAL LOCK

Defines control for the use of the LOC mode. The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel.

• When LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to LOC mode.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the lock. The control panel can select LOC and control the drive.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.

• Activating the digital input locks out local control.

• De-activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.

• See DI1 above.

7 = ON - Sets the lock. The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive.

8 = COMM - Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The Command Word is 0301.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.

• De-activating the digital input locks out local control.

• Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.

• See DI1(INV) above.

1607

PARAM SAVE

Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.

• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory. To save, you must use

this parameter.

• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from the control panel are not saved. To save, you

must use this parameter.

• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to

permanent memory.

0 = DONE - Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved.

1 = SAVE… - Saves altered parameters to permanent memory.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

131

Code

Description

1608

START ENABLE 1

Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal.

Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.

0 = NOT SEL - Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.

• This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal.

• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the

panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal.

• Bit 2 of the Command word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 1 signal.

• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.

-2…-6 = DI2 (INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.

• See DI1 (INV) above.

Drive started

START/STOP

COMMAND

(Group 10)

START ENABLE

SIGNAL

(Parameters

1608 & 1609)

Relay energized

Relay

STARTED

de-energized

RELAY STATUS

(Group 14)

Damper open

Damper

closed

DAMPER

STATUS

Damper

opening

closing

time

RUN ENABLE SIGNAL

from the damper end

switch when the

damper is fully opened.

(Parameter 1601)

MOTOR STATUS

Acceleration

Drive coasts

time

to stop

(Par 2202)

Parameters

132

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

1609

START ENABLE 2

Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal.

Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.

0 = NOT SEL - Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.

• This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal.

• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the

panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal. Bit 3 of the Command

word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 2 signal.

• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.

• See DI1 (INV) above.

1610

DISPLAY ALARMS

Controls the visibility of the following alarms:

•

2001, Overcurrent alarm

•

2002, Overvoltage alarm

•

2003, Undervoltage alarm

•

2009, Device overtemperature alarm.

For more information, see section Alarm listing on page 267.

0 = NO - The above alarms are suppressed.

1 = YES - All of the above alarms are enabled.

1611

PARAMETER VIEW

Selects the parameter view, i.e. which parameters are shown.

Note: This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device. FlashDrop is designed for

fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. It allows easy customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected

parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01 FlashDrop User’s Manual (3AFE68591074

[English]).

FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 (LOAD FD SET).

0 = DEFAULT - Complete long and short parameter lists are shown.

1 = FLASHDROP - FlashDrop parameter list is shown. Does not include short parameter list. Parameters that are

hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible.

1612

FAN CONTROL

Selects drive cooling fan control. Can be used to mitigate DC voltage fluctuations.

0 = AUTO - Fan is controlled automatically (default).

1 = ON - Fan is always forced on.

1613

FAULT RESET

Allows to reset faults with a parameter. Can be used to reset faults from remote monitoring systems that have access

to drive parameters.

0 = DEFAULT - Fault is not reset (default)

1 = RESET NOW - Resets fault.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

133

Group 20: LIMITS

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor -

speed, frequency, current, torque, etc.

Code

Description

2001

MINIMUM SPEED

Speed

2001 value is < 0

Defines the minimum speed (rpm) allowed.

P 2002

• A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges,

one positive and one negative.

Speed range allowed

• A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range.

Time

• See the figure.

P 2001

2002

MAXIMUM SPEED

Speed

2001 value is > 0

Defines the maximum speed (rpm) allowed.

P 2002

Speed range allowed

P 2001

Time

-(P 2001)

Speed range allowed

-(P 2002)

2003

MAX CURRENT

Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the motor.

2005

OVERVOLT CTRL

Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off.

• Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the

DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by

increasing output frequency.

0 = DISABLE - Disables controller.

1 = ENABLE - Enables controller

Note: If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive, this parameter value must be set to

(DISABLE) to ensure proper operation of the chopper.

2006

UNDERVOLT CTRL

Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:

• If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in

order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.

• When the motor speed decreases, the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC

bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip.

• The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride-through on systems with a high inertia, such as a

centrifuge or a fan.

0 = DISABLE - Disables controller.

1 = ENABLE(TIME) - Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation.

2 = ENABLE - Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation.

Parameters

134

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2007

MINIMUM FREQ

Freq

2007 value is < 0

Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency.

P 2008

• A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two

ranges, one positive and one negative.

Frequency range allowed

• A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range.

Time

See the figure.

Note: Keep MINIMUM FREQ  MAXIMUM FREQ.

P 2007

2008

MAXIMUM FREQ

Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.

Freq

2007 value is > 0

P 2008

Frequency range allowed

P 2007

Time

-(P 2007)

Frequency range allowed

-(P 2008)

2013

MIN TORQUE SEL

Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits (2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2).

0 = MIN TORQUE 1 - Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.

• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.

• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The Command Word is parameter 0301.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.

• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.

• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit

used.

• See DI1(INV) above.

2014

MAX TORQUE SEL

Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits (2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2).

0 = MAX TORQUE 1 - Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.

• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.

• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The Command Word is parameter 0301.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.

• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.

• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit

used.

• See DI1(INV) above.

2015

MIN TORQUE 1

Sets the first minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.

2016

MIN TORQUE 2

Sets the second minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.

Parameters

136

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 21: START/STOP

This group defines how the motor starts and stops. The ACS550 supports several

start and stop modes.

Code

Description

2101

START FUNCTION

Selects the motor start method. The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.

1 = AUTO - Selects the automatic start mode.

• Vector control modes: Optimal start in most cases. The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to

start a rotating motor.

• SCALAR:FREQ mode: Immediate start from zero frequency. Identical to selection 8 = RAMP.

2 = DC MAGN - Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode.

Note: The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor.

Note: The drive starts when the set pre-magnetizing time (parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME) has passed, even if motor

magnetization is not complete.

• Vector control modes: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME

using DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time. This selection guarantees

the highest possible break-away torque.

• SCALAR:FREQ mode: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using

DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time.

3 = SCALAR FLYST - Selects the flying start mode.

• Vector control modes: Not applicable.

• SCALAR:FREQ mode: The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor - useful

if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.

• Cannot be used in multimotor systems.

4 = TORQ BOOST - Selects the automatic torque boost mode (SCALAR:FREQ mode only).

• May be necessary in drives with high starting torque.

• Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is

equal to reference.

• In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC

current.

• See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.

5 = FLY + BOOST - Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode (SCALAR:FREQ mode only).

• Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, the torque

boost is done.

8 = RAMP - Immediate start from zero frequency.

2102

STOP FUNCTION

Selects the motor stop method.

1 = COAST - Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method. The motor coasts to stop.

2 = RAMP - Selects using a deceleration ramp.

• Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 (whichever is active).

2103

DC MAGN TIME

Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.

• Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.

• After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor.

• Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor

excessively.

2104

DC HOLD CTL

Motor

DC hold

Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold.

speed

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the DC current operation.

1 = DC HOLD - Enables the DC Hold function. See the diagram.

• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)

• Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when

both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter

Ref

2105.

• When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive

DC hold

resumes normal operation.

speed

2 = DC BRAKING - Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has

stopped.

• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST), braking is applied after start is removed.

• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 (RAMP), braking is applied after ramp.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

137

Code

Description

2105

DC HOLD SPEED

Sets the speed for DC Hold. Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL = 1 (DC HOLD).

2106

DC CURR REF

Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.

2107

DC BRAKE TIME

Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter 2104 is 2 (DC BRAKING).

2108

START INHIBIT

Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. If the drive is not actively started and running, the Start inhibit function ignores

a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required:

• A fault is reset.

• Run Enable (parameter 1601) activates while start command is active.

• Mode changes from local to remote.

• Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2.

• Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1.

0 = OFF - Disables the Start inhibit function.

1 = ON - Enables the Start inhibit function.

2109

EMERG STOP SEL

Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:

• Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp (parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME).

• Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.

• Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.

• De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.

• See DI1 above.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.

• De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.

• Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.

• See DI1(INV) above.

2110

TORQ BOOST CURR

Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost.

• See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.

Parameters

138

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2112

ZERO SPEED DELAY

Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function. If parameter value is set to zero, the Zero Speed Delay function

is disabled.

The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay the drive

knows accurately the rotor position.

No Zero Speed Delay

With Zero Speed Delay

Speed

Speed controller switched off:

Speed controller remains live.

Motor coasts to stop.

Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed.

Zero Speed

Delay

Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with jogging function or mechanical brake.

No Zero Speed Delay

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an

internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched off. The drive modulation is stopped and the motor

coasts to standstill.

With Zero Speed Delay

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an

internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the

speed controller live: The drive modulates, motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart.

Note: Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 = RAMP for zero speed delay to operate.

0.0 = NOT SEL - Disables the Zero Speed Delay function.

2113

START DELAY

Defines the Start delay. After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed

and then starts the motor. Start delay can be used with all start modes.

• If START DELAY = zero, the delay is disabled.

• During the Start delay, alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

139

Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL

This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration. You

define these ramps as a pair, one for acceleration and one for deceleration. You can

define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair.

Code

Description

2201

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

Defines control for selection of acceleration/deceleration ramps.

• Ramps are defined in pairs, one each for acceleration and deceleration.

• See below for the ramp definition parameters.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.

• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.

• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The Command Word is parameter 0301.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.

• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2

• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.

• See DI1(INV) above.

2202

ACCELER TIME 1

MAX

Linear

Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1. See A in

FREQ

the figure.

• Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.

• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.

2203

DECELER TIME 1

B (=0)

Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1.

• Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.

• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.

MAX

S-curve

2204

RAMP SHAPE 1

FREQ

Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. See B in

the figure.

• Shape is defined as a ramp, unless additional time is specified here to reach the

maximum frequency. A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the

slope. The shape becomes an s-curve.

• Rule of thumb: 1/5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the

acceleration ramp time.

0.0 = LINEAR - Specifies linear acceleration/deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1.

A = 2202 ACCELER TIME 1

0.1…1000.0 = S-CURVE - Specifies s-curve acceleration/deceleration ramps for

B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1

ramp pair 1.

2205

ACCELER TIME 2

Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2.

• See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.

• Used also as jogging acceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.

2206

DECELER TIME 2

Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2.

• See 2203 DECELER TIME 1.

• Used also as jogging deceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.

2207

RAMP SHAPE 2

Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2.

• See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.

Parameters

140

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2208

EMERG DEC TIME

Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency.

• See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL.

• Ramp is linear.

2209

RAMP INPUT 0

Defines control for forcing the speed to 0 with the currently used deceleration ramp (see parameters 2203 DECELER

TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2).

0 = NOT SEL - Not selected.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.

• Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero, after which the speed will stay at 0.

• De-activating the digital input: speed control resumes normal operation.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.

• See DI1 above.

7 = COMM - Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.

• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.

• The Command Word is parameter 0301.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.

• De-activating the digital input forces the speed to 0.

• Activating the digital input: speed control resumes normal operation.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.

• See DI1(INV) above.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

141

Group 23: SPEED CONTROL

This group defines variables used for speed control operation.

Code

Description

2301

PROP GAIN

Gain = K_p = 1

Sets the relative gain for the speed controller.

TI = Integration time = 0

• Larger values may cause speed oscillation.

TD= Derivation time = 0

• The figure shows the speed controller output

Error value

after an error step (error remains constant).

Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE

RUN to automatically set the proportional gain.

Controller output

Controller

e = Error value

output =

K_p · e

2302

INTEGRATION TIME

Controller output

Sets the integration time for the speed

controller.

Gain = K_p = 1

• The integration time defines the rate at which

T_I= Integration time > 0

the controller output changes for a constant

K_p · e

T_D= Derivation time = 0

error value.

• Shorter integration times correct continuous

errors faster.

• Control becomes unstable if the integration

time is too short.

e = Error value

p · e

• The figure shows the speed controller output

after an error step (error remains constant).

Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE

RUN to automatically set the integration time.

T_I

2303

DERIVATION TIME

Sets the derivation time for the speed controller.

• Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes.

• The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change.

• If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.

The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.

Controller output

e

K_p · T_D ·

K_p · e

Error value

Gain = K_p = 1

K_p · e

e = Error value

T_I= Integration time > 0

T_D= Derivation time > 0

Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms

e = Error value change between two samples

T_I

Parameters

142

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2304

ACC COMPENSATION

Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation.

• Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during

acceleration.

•

2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action.

• Rule of thumb: Set this parameter between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor

and the driven machine.

• The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.

* No acceleration compensation

Acceleration compensation

Speed reference

Actual speed

*Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation.

2305

AUTOTUNE RUN

Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller.

0 = OFF - Disables the Autotune creation process. (Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings.)

1 = ON - Activates speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to OFF.

Procedure:

Note: The motor load must be connected.

• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.

• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.

The drive:

• Accelerates the motor.

• Calculates values for proportional gain, integration time and acceleration compensation.

• Changes parameters 2301, 2302 and 2304 to these values.

• Resets 2305 to OFF.

Parameters

144

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be

avoided due, for example, to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds.

Code

Description

2501

CRIT SPEED SEL

foutput

Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed

function avoids specific speed ranges.

0 = OFF - Disables the critical speeds function.

1 = ON - Enables the critical speeds function.

Example: To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly:

• Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to

be: 18…23 Hz and 46…52 Hz.

• Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL = 1.

• Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO = 18 Hz.

• Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI = 23 Hz.

fREF (Hz)

• Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz.

f1L

f1H

f2L

f2H

• Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz.

2502

CRIT SPEED 1 LO

Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.

• The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI.

• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ), then units are Hz.

2503

CRIT SPEED 1 HI

Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.

• The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.

• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ), then units are Hz.

2504

CRIT SPEED 2 LO

Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2.

• See parameter 2502.

2505

CRIT SPEED 2 HI

Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2.

• See parameter 2503.

2506

CRIT SPEED 3 LO

Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3.

• See parameter 2502.

2507

CRIT SPEED 3 HI

Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3.

• See parameter 2503.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

145

Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL

This group defines variables used for motor control.

Code

Description

2601

FLUX OPT ENABLE

Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy

consumption and noise, and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.

0 = OFF - Disables the feature.

1 = ON - Enables the feature.

2602

FLUX BRAKING

Braking

Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of

Rated motor power

torque (%)

magnetization in the motor when needed, instead of

2.2 kW

120%

Without flux braking

limiting the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in

15 kW

the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is

37 kW

changed to thermal energy in the motor.

75 kW

• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =

250 kW

(VECTOR:sPEED) OR 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).

0 = OFF - Disables the feature.

1 = ON - Enables the feature.

f (Hz)

120%

With flux braking

f (Hz)

2603

IR COMP VOLT

IR compensation

Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz.

• When enabled, IR compensation provides an extra

• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =

voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR

(SCALAR:FREQ).

compensation, for example, in applications that require a

• Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent

high breakaway torque.

overheating.

Motor

• Typical IR compensation values are:

voltage

380…480 V drives

P_N (kW)

7.5

132

A = IR compensated

IR comp (V)

B = No compensation

P 2603

2604

IR COMP FREQ

f (Hz)

Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in

% of motor frequency).

P 2604

2605

U/F RATIO

Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below field weakening point.

1 = LINEAR - Preferred for constant torque applications.

2 = SQUARED - Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications. (SQUARED is more silent for most operating

frequencies.)

Parameters

146

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2606

SWITCHING FREQ

Sets the switching frequency for the drive. Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching

frequency derating on page 280.

• Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.

• In multimotor systems, do not change the switching frequency from the default value.

•

12 kHz switching frequency is available in scalar control mode, that is when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3

(SCALAR:FREQ).

• See the availability of switching frequencies for different drive types in the table below.

1, 2, 4 and 8 kHz

12 kHz

208…240 V

All types

Frame sizes R1…R4 in scalar control mode

380…480 V

All types

Frame sizes R1…R4 (except ACS550-01-097A-4) in scalar control mode

500…600 V

All types

Frame sizes R2…R4 in scalar control mode

2607

SWITCH FREQ CTRL

fsw

R1…R4 drives, see par 2606

The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550

limit

internal temperature rises above a limit. See the figure.

R5…R6 drives, see par 2606

This function allows the highest possible switching

12 kHz

frequency to be used based on operating conditions.

8 kHz

Drive

Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic

temperature

noise.

4 kHz

• In multimotor systems, do no disable (set OFF) the

function.

0 = OFF - The function is disabled.

80 °C

90 °C

100 °C

1 = ON - The switching frequency is limited according to

the figure.

2608

SLIP COMP RATIO

Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).

• A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for

the slip.

• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).

0 - No slip compensation.

1…200 - Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation.

2609

NOISE SMOOTHING

This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic

motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity.

The random component has an average of 0 Hz. It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606

SWITCHING FREQ. This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 = 12 kHz.

0 = DISABLE

1 = ENABLE.

2619

DC STABILIZER

Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible

voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network. In case of voltage variation the

drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation.

0 = DISABLE - Disables DC stabilizer.

1 = ENABLE - Enables DC stabilizer.

2625

OVERMODULATION

Enables or disables overmodulation. Disabling overmodulation can help in some applications in field weakening

area.

0 = DISABLE - Disables overmodulation.

1 = ENABLE - Enables overmodulation.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

147

Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG

This group contains usage levels and trigger points. When usage reaches the set

trigger point, a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due.

Code

Description

2901

COOLING FAN TRIG

Sets the trigger point for the drive’s cooling fan counter.

• Value is compared to parameter 2902 value.

0.0 - Disables the trigger.

2902

COOLING FAN ACT

Defines the actual value of the drive’s cooling fan counter.

• When parameter 2901 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.

• When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is

displayed on the panel.

0.0 - Resets the parameter.

2903

REVOLUTION TRIG

Sets the trigger point for the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.

• Value is compared to parameter 2904 value.

0 - Disables the trigger.

2904

REVOLUTION ACT

Defines the actual value of the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.

• When parameter 2903 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.

• When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903, a maintenance notice is

displayed on the panel.

0 - Resets the parameter.

2905

RUN TIME TRIG

Sets the trigger point for the drive’s run time counter.

• Value is compared to parameter 2906 value.

0.0 - Disables the trigger.

2906

RUN TIME ACT

Defines the actual value of the drive’s run time counter.

• When parameter 2905 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.

• When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905, a maintenance notice is

displayed on the panel.

0.0 - Resets the parameter.

2907

USER MWh TRIG

Sets the trigger point for the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.

• Value is compared to parameter 2908 value.

0.0 - Disables the trigger.

2908

USER MWh ACT

Defines the actual value of the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.

• When parameter 2907 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.

• When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907, a maintenance notice is

displayed on the panel.

0.0 - Resets the parameter.

Parameters

148

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and

defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected.

Code

Description

3001

AI<MIN FUNCTION

Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below the fault limits and AI is used

• as the active reference source (Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT)

• as the Process or External PID controllers' feedback or setpoint source (Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1, Group

41: PROCESS PID SET 2 or Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID) and the corresponding PID controller is active.

3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits.

0 = NOT SEL - No response.

1 = FAULT - Displays a fault (7, AI1 LOSS or 8, AI2 LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.

2 = CONST SP 7 - Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.

3 = LAST SPEED - Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level.

This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the

analog input signal is lost.

3002

PANEL COMM ERR

Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error.

1 = FAULT - Displays a fault (10, PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.

2 = CONST SP 7 - Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.

3 = LAST SPEED - Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is

the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

Note: When either of the two external control locations are active, and start, stop and/or direction are through the

control panel - 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS / 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS = 8 (KEYPAD) - the drive follows speed/frequency

reference according to the configuration of the external control locations, instead of the value of the last speed or

parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7.

WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the

control panel communication is lost.

3003

EXTERNAL FAULT 1

Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.

0 = NOT SEL - External fault signal is not used.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input.

• Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to

stop.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.

• See DI1 above.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input.

• De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to

stop.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.

• See DI1(INV) above.

3004

EXTERNAL FAULT 2

Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.

• See parameter 3003 above.

3005

MOT THERM PROT

Defines the drive response to motor overheating.

0 = NOT SEL - No response and/or motor thermal protection not set up.

1 = FAULT - When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 °C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP). When

the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 °C, displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.

2 = ALARM - When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 °C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP).

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

149

Code

Description

3006

MOT THERM TIME

Motor load

Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature

model.

• This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final

temperature with steady load.

• For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA

Temp. rise

100%

class motors, use the rule of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals

35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor

63%

manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six

times its rated current.

• The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class

P 3006

20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.

3007

MOT LOAD CURVE

Output current relative to

Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor.

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR

• With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is functioning

150

when the constant current exceeds 127% of the parameter 9906

MOTOR NOM CURR value.

• The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor

P 3007

100 =

manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F) ambient

127%

temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude. When the ambient

temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or the installation altitude is over

P 3008

1000 m (3300 ft), decrease the parameter 3007 value according to

the motor manufacturer’s recommendation.

Frequency

Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115% of

the motor nominal current, set parameter 3007 value to 91%

P 3009

(= 115/127·100%).

3008

ZERO SPEED LOAD

Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.

• Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.

3009

BREAK POINT FREQ

Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.

Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME, 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008

ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values.

IO/^IN

3.5

3.0

60 s

IO = Output current

2.5

90 s

IN = Nominal motor current

2.0

fO = Output frequency

180 s

fBRK = Break point frequency

1.5

300 s

A = Trip time

600 s

1.0



0.5

fO/^fBRK

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

Parameters

150

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

3010

STALL FUNCTION

This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This

protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see the

figure) for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME. The “User Limit” is

defined in Group 20: LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1, 2018 MAX TORQUE

Torque/

2, or the limit on the COMM input.

Current

0 = NOT SEL - Stall protection is not used.

1 = FAULT - When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set

Stall region

by 3012 STALL TIME:

• The drive coasts to stop.

95%

• A fault indication is displayed.

User

2 = ALARM - When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set

limit

by 3012 STALL TIME:

• An alarm indication is displayed.

• The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for

half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME.

3011

STALL FREQUENCY

P 3011

This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. Refer to

Stall frequency

the figure.

3012

STALL TIME

This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.

3017

EARTH FAULT

Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables. The drive monitors for

ground faults while the drive is running, and while the drive is not running. See also parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT

and 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL.

Note: Disabling earth fault (ground fault) may void the warranty.

0 = DISABLE - No drive response to ground faults.

1 = ENABLE - Ground faults display fault 16 (EARTH FAULT), and (if running) the drive coasts to stop.

3018

COMM FAULT FUNC

Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.

0 = NOT SEL - No response.

1 = FAULT - Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to stop.

2 = CONST SP 7 - Displays an alarm (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed”

remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value.

3 = LAST SPEED - Displays an alarm (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is the

average speed over the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the fieldbus writes a new

reference value.

WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when

fieldbus communication is lost.

3019

COMM FAULT TIME

Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.

• Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME

value.

3021

AI1 FAULT LIMIT

Sets a fault level for analog input 1.

• See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.

3022

AI2 FAULT LIMIT

Sets a fault level for analog input 2.

• See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

151

Code

Description

3023

WIRING FAULT

Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running. When

the drive is not running it monitors for:

• Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can display fault 35, OUTPUT WIRING if improper

connections are detected).

• Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017

EARTH FAULT.

Note: Disabling wiring fault (ground fault) may void the warranty.

0 = DISABLE - No drive response to either of the above monitoring results.

1 = ENABLE - The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems.

3024

CB TEMP FAULT

Defines the drive response to control board overheating. Not for drives with an OMIO control board.

0 = DISABLE - No response.

1 = ENABLE - Displays fault 37 (CB OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.

3028

EARTH FAULT LVL

Defines detection level for earth fault. See Correcting faults, fault 16, EARTH FAULT.

Note: Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT has to be enabled.

1 = LOW - Low level leakage current, high sensitivity. The drive trips to low ground (earth) leakage current (default in

the USA software version).

2 = MEDIUM - Medium sensitivity to ground (earth) fault current (default in the European software version).

3 = HIGH - High level leakage current, low sensitivity. The drive trips to higher ground (earth) leakage current.

Parameters

152

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic reset occurs after a

particular fault is detected. The drive holds for a set delay time, then automatically

restarts. You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up

automatic resets for a variety of faults.

Code

Description

3101

NUMBER OF TRIALS

Example: Three faults have occurred in

Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined

the trial time. The last is reset only if the

by 3102 TRIAL TIME.

value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or

• If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial

more.

time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains

stopped.

Trial time

• Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control

Time

panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL.

X X

3102

TRIAL TIME

x = Automatic reset

Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets.

• See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS.

3103

DELAY TIME

Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart.

• If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.

3104

AR OVERCURRENT

Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.

• Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes

normal operation.

3105

AR OVERVOLTAGE

Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.

• Automatically resets the fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes

normal operation.

3106

AR UNDERVOLTAGE

Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.

• Automatically resets the fault (DC UNDERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes

normal operation.

3107

AR AI<MIN

Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.

• Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal

operation.

WARNING! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may restart, even after a long stop. Make

sure that automatic, long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.

3108

AR EXTERNAL FLT

Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.

0 = DISABLE - Disables automatic reset.

1 = ENABLE - Enables automatic reset.

• Automatically resets the fault (EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive

resumes normal operation.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

153

Group 32: SUPERVISION

This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01: OPERATING

DATA. Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if

the parameter passes a defined limit. Use Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS to define the

relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high.

Code

Description

3201

SUPERV 1 PARAM

Selects the first supervised parameter.

• Must be a parameter number from Group 01: OPERATING

DATA.

•

100 = NOT SELECTED - No parameter selected.

LO  HI

•

101…178 - Selects parameter 0101…0178.

Note: Case LO HI represents a normal hysteresis.

• If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output is

Value of supervised parameter

energized.

• The supervision limits are defined in this group.

HI (3203)

• The relay outputs are defined in Group 14: RELAY

LO (3202)

OUTPUTS (definition also specifies which supervision limit

is monitored).

LO  HI

Case A

Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LOHI.

Energized (1)

• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY

OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. Use

for monitoring when/if the supervised signal exceeds a

given limit. The relay remains active until the supervised

Case B

value drops below the low limit.

Energized (1)

• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY

OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER.

Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal falls

below a given limit. The relay remains active until the

LO > HI

supervised value rises above the high limit.

Note: Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis with

LO HI

two separate supervision limits.

Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO>HI.

Active limit

Value of supervised parameter

The lowest limit (HI 3203) is active initially and remains active

until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit

LO (3202)

(LO 3202), making that limit the active limit. That limit remains

HI (3203)

active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest

limit (HI 3203), making that limit active.

• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY

OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER.

Case A

Initially the relay is de-energized. It is energized whenever

Energized (1)

the supervised parameter goes above the active limit.

• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY

OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER.

Case B

Initially the relay is energized. It is de-energized whenever

Energized (1)

the supervised parameter goes below the active limit.

3202

SUPERV 1 LIM LO

Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See

3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.

3203

SUPERV 1 LIM HI

Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See

3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.

3204

SUPERV 2 PARAM

Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.

3205

SUPERV 2 LIM LO

Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.

3206

SUPERV 2 LIM HI

Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

155

Group 33: INFORMATION

This group provides access to information about the drive’s current programs:

versions and test date.

Code

Description

3301

FIRMWARE

Contains the version of the drive’s firmware.

3302

LOADING PACKAGE

Contains the version of the loading package.

3303

TEST DATE

Contains the test date (yy.ww).

3304

DRIVE RATING

Indicates the drive’s current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY, where:

• XXX = The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes. If present, an “A” indicates a decimal point in the rating

for the current. For example XXX = 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8.8 A.

• Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = :

• 2 indicates a 208…240 V rating.

• 4 indicates a 380…480 V rating.

• 6 indicates a 500…600 V rating.

3305

PARAMETER TABLE

Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive.

Parameters

156

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY

This group defines the content for control panel display (middle area), when the

control panel is in the Output mode.

Code

Description

3401

SIGNAL1 PARAM

P 3404 P 3405

Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control

panel.

LOC

49.1Hz

• Definitions in this group define display content when the control

P 3401 (=137)

49.1 Hz

panel is in the control mode.

P 3408 (=138)

0.5 A

• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be

selected.

P 3415 (=139)

10.7 %

• Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled,

DIR

00:00

converted to convenient units and/or displayed as a bar graph.

LOC

5.0Hz

• The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group.

50%

• If just one or two parameters are selected for display, that is just

one or two of the values of parameters 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM, 3408

P 3404

0.4 A

SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM are other than 100 (NOT

24.4 %

SELECTED), the number and name of each displayed parameter are

DIR

00:00

shown in addition to the value.

100 = NOT SELECTED - First parameter not displayed.

101…178 - Displays parameter 0101…0178. If parameter does not

exist, the display shows “n.a.”.

3402

SIGNAL1 MIN

Display

Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter.

value

Use parameters 3402, 3403, 3406 and 3407, for example to convert

a Group 01: OPERATING DATA parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in

P 3407

rpm) to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor (in ft/min). For

such a conversion, the source values in the figure are the min. and

max. motor speed, and the display values are the corresponding min.

and max. conveyor speed. Use parameter 3405 to select the proper

P 3406

units for the display.

Note: Selecting units does not convert values. Parameter is not

P3402

P 3403

effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).

Source value

3403

SIGNAL1 MAX

Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter.

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP

FORM = 9 (DIRECT).

3404

OUTPUT1 DSP FORM

3404 value

Display

Range

Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.

+ 3

-32768…+32767

0…7 - Defines the decimal point location.

+ 3.1

(Signed)

• Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal

point.

+ 3.14

• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159).

+ 3.142

8 = BAR METER - Specifies a bar meter display.

0…65535

9 = DIRECT - Decimal point location and units of measure are

3.1

(Unsigned)

identical to the source signal. See Group 01: OPERATING DATA

3.14

parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 91

3.142

for resolution (which indicates the decimal point location) and the

Bar meter displayed.

units of measure.

Decimal point location and

units as for the source

signal.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

157

Code

Description

3405

OUTPUT1 UNIT

Selects the units used with the first display parameter.

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).

0 = NO UNIT

9 = °C

18 = MWh

27 = ft

36 = l/s

45 = Pa

54 = lb/m

63 = Mrev

1 = A

10 = lb ft

19 = m/s

28 = MGD

37 = l/min

46 = GPS

55 = lb/h

64 = d

2 = V

11 = mA

20 = m³/h

29 = inHg

38 = l/h

47 = gal/s

56 = FPS

65 = inWC

3 = Hz

12 = mV

21 = dm³/s

30 = FPM

39 = m³/s

48 = gal/m

57 = ft/s

66 = m/min

4 = %

13 = kW

22 = bar

31 = kb/s

40 = m³/m

49 = gal/h

58 = inH₂O

67 = Nm

5 = s

14 = W

23 = kPa

32 = kHz

41 = kg/s

50 = ft³/s

59 = in wg

68 = Km³/h

6 = h

15 = kWh

24 = GPM

33 = ohm

42 = kg/m

51 = ft³/m

60 = ft wg

7 = rpm

16 = °F

25 = PSI

34 = ppm

43 = kg/h

52 = ft³/h

61 = lbsi

8 = kh

17 = hp

26 = CFM

35 = pps

44 = mbar

53 = lb/s

62 = ms

The following units are useful for the bar display.

117 = %ref

119 = %dev

121 = % SP

123 = Iout

125 = Fout

127 = Vdc

118 = %act

120 = % LD

122 = %FBK 124 = Vout

126 = Tout

3406

OUTPUT1 MIN

Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter.

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).

3407

OUTPUT1 MAX

Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.

Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).

3408

SIGNAL2 PARAM

Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.

3409

SIGNAL2 MIN

Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3402.

3410

SIGNAL2 MAX

Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3403.

3411

OUTPUT2 DSP FORM

Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter. See parameter 3404.

3412

OUTPUT2 UNIT

Selects the units used with the second display parameter. See parameter 3405.

3413

OUTPUT2 MIN

Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3406.

3414

OUTPUT2 MAX

Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3407.

3415

SIGNAL3 PARAM

Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.

3416

SIGNAL3 MIN

Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3402.

3417

SIGNAL3 MAX

Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3403.

3418

OUTPUT3 DSP FORM

Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter. See parameter 3404.

3419

OUTPUT3 UNIT

Selects the units used with the third display parameter. See parameter 3405.

3420

OUTPUT3 MIN

Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3406.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

159

Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault - motor

overheating, as detected by a temperature sensor. Typical connections are shown

below.

One sensor

Three sensors

AI1

Motor

AGND

AO1

AGND

3.3 nF

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts

and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-

conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.

To fulfil this requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar components) to the

drive’s control terminals using any of these alternatives:

• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced

insulation.

• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs. Protect

against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation

(rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).

• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same

voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.

The figure below shows thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital

input. At the motor end, the cable shield should be earthed through, eg a 3.3 nF

capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the shield unconnected.

Thermistor relay

PTC sensor

3501 SENSOR TYPE = 5 (THERM(0)) or 6 (THERM(1))

3501 SENSOR TYPE = 5 (THERM(0))

Thermistor

relay

Control board

DI6

+24 V DC

3.3 nF

Motor

Parameters

160

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

For other faults, or for anticipating motor overheating using a model, see Group 30:

FAULT FUNCTIONS.

Code

Description

3501

SENSOR TYPE

Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used, PT100 (°C), PTC (ohm) or thermistor.

See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL.

0 = NONE

1 = 1 x PT100 - Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor.

• Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor.

• The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.

• The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to

degrees Celsius.

2 = 2 x PT100 - Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors.

• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.

3 = 3 x PT100 - Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors.

• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.

4 = PTC - Sensor configuration uses one PTC.

• The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor.

• The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor

temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (T_ref), as

does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement

Excessive

function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it

into ohms.

• The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance

as a function of the motor operating temperature.

Temperature

Resistance

Normal

< 1.5 kohm

Excessive

>4kohm

5 = THERM(0) - Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.

• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect

either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital

input.

• When the digital input is ‘0’, the motor is overheated.

• See the connection figure on page 159.

• The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and

a digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature.

Temperature

Resistance

Normal

< 3 kohm

Excessive

> 28 kohm

6 = THERM(1) - Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.

• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital

input.

• When the digital input is ‘1’, the motor is overheated.

• See the connection figure on page 159.

3502

INPUT SELECTION

Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.

1 = AI1 - PT100 and PTC.

2 = AI2 - PT100 and PTC.

3…8 = DI1…DI6 - Thermistor and PTC

3503

ALARM LIMIT

Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement.

• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP)

For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input:

0 - de-activated

1 - activated

Parameters

162

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS

This group defines the timed functions. The timed functions include:

• four daily start and stop times

• four weekly start, stop and boost times

• four timers for collecting selected periods together.

A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in

multiple timers.

Time Period 1

3602 START TIME 1

3603 STOP TIME 1

3604 START DAY 1

3605 STOP DAY 1

Time Period 2

Timer 1

3606 START TIME 2

3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC

3607 STOP TIME 2

3608 START DAY 2

3609 STOP DAY 2

Timer 2

3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC

Time Period 3

3610 START TIME 3

Timer 3

3611 STOP TIME 3

3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC

3612 START DAY 3

3613 STOP DAY 3

Timer 4

3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC

Time Period 4

3614 START TIME 4

3615 STOP TIME 4

3616 START DAY 4

3617 STOP DAY 4

Booster

3622 BOOSTER SEL

3623 BOOSTER TIME

A parameter can be connected to only one timer.

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

Timer 1

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS

3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC

1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL

1201 CONST SPEED SEL

Timer 2

1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3

1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6

3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC

(Available if OREL-01 is installed.)

4027 PID 1 PARAM SET

4228 ACTIVATE

8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG

You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring. For more information

on the assistants, see section Assistants mode on page 57.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

163

Code

Description

3601

TIMERS ENABLE

Selects the source for the timer enable signal.

0 = NOT SEL - Timed functions are disabled.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.

• The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.

7 = ACTIVE - Timed functions are enabled.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.

• This digital input must be de-activated to enable the timed function.

•

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.

3602

START TIME 1

Defines the daily start time.

20:30:00

Time period 2

• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.

17:00:00

• If parameter value is 07:00:00, the timer is activated

Time period 4

at 7 a.m.

15:00:00

• The figure shows multiple timers on different

weekdays.

13:00:00

Time period 3

12:00:00

10:30:00

Time period 1

09:00:00

00:00:00

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

3603

STOP TIME 1

Defines the daily stop time.

• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.

• If the parameter value is 09:00:00, the timer is deactivated at 9 a.m.

3604

START DAY 1

Defines the weekly start day.

1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY

• If parameter value is 1, timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00).

3605

STOP DAY 1

Defines weekly stop day.

1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY

• If parameter value is 5, timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).

3606

START TIME 2

Defines timer2 daily start time.

• See parameter 3602.

3607

STOP TIME 2

Defines timer 2 daily stop time.

• See parameter 3603.

3608

START DAY 2

Defines timer 2 weekly start day.

• See parameter 3604.

3609

STOP DAY 2

Defines timer 2 weekly stop day.

• See parameter 3605.

3610

START TIME 3

Defines timer 3 daily start time.

• See parameter 3602.

3611

STOP TIME 3

Defines timer 3 daily stop time.

• See parameter 3603.

Parameters

164

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

3612

START DAY 3

Defines timer 3 weekly start day.

• See parameter 3604.

3613

STOP DAY 3

Defines timer 3 weekly stop day.

• See parameter 3605.

3614

START TIME 4

Defines timer 4 daily start time.

• See parameter 3602.

3615

STOP TIME 4

Defines timer 4 daily stop time.

• See parameter 3603.

3616

START DAY 4

Defines timer 4 weekly start day.

• See parameter 3604.

3617

STOP DAY 4

Defines timer 4 weekly stop day.

• See parameter 3605.

3622

BOOSTER SEL

Selects the source for the booster signal.

0 = NOT SEL - Booster signal is disabled.

1 = DI1 - Defines DI1 as the booster signal.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.

3623

BOOSTER TIME

Defines the booster ON time. Time is started when booster sel

signal is released. If parameter value is 01:30:00, booster is

Booster active

active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released.

Activation DI

Booster time

3626

TIMED FUNC 1 SRC

Defines the time periods used by the timer.

0 = NOT SEL - No time periods have been selected.

1 = T1 - Time Period 1 selected in the timer.

2 = T2 - Time Period 2 selected in the timer.

3 = T1+T2 - Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.

4 = T3 - Time Period 3 selected in the timer.

5 = T1+T3 - Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer.

6 = T2+T3 - Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer.

7 = T1+T2+T3 - Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.

8 = T4 - Time Period 4 selected in the timer.

9 = T1+T4 - Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer.

10 = T2+T4 - Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer.

11 = T1+T2+T4 - Time Periods 1, 2 and 4 selected in the timer.

12 = T3+T4 - Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

13 = T1+T3+T4 - Time Periods 1, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

14 = T2+T3+T4 - Time Periods 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

15 = T1+T2+T3+T4 - Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

16 = BOOSTER - Booster selected in the timer.

17 = T1+B - Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer.

18 = T2+B - Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer.

19 = T1+T2+B - Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.

20 = T3+B - Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

165

Code

Description

21 = T1+T3+B - Booster and Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer.

22 = T2+T3+B - Booster and Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer.

23 = T1+T2+T3+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.

24 = T4+B - Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer.

25 = T1+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer.

26 = T2+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer.

27 = T1+T2+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 2 and 4 selected in the timer.

28 = T3+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

29 = T1+T3+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

30 = T2+T3+T4+B - Booster and Time Periods 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

31 = T1+2+3+4+B - Booster and Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.

3627

TIMED FUNC 2 SRC

• See parameter 3626.

3628

TIMED FUNC 3 SRC

• See parameter 3626.

3629

TIMED FUNC 4 SRC

• See parameter 3626.

Parameters

166

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE

This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves (motor torque as a

function of frequency). The curve is defined by five points.

Code

Description

3701

USER LOAD C MODE

Motor torque (%)

Supervision mode for the user adjustable load

curves.

Overload area

This functionality replaces the former underload

supervision in Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS. To

P3706

P3709

emulate it, see section Correspondence with the

P3712

P3715

P3718

obsolete underload supervision on page 167.

P3714

P3717

0 = NOT SEL - Supervision is not active.

Allowed operating area

1 = UNDERLOAD - Supervision for the torque

dropping below the underload curve.

2 = OVERLOAD - Supervision for the torque

P3711

exceeding the overload curve.

P3705

3 = BOTH - Supervision for the torque dropping

Underload area

below the underload curve or exceeding the

P3708

overload curve.

P3704

P3707

P3710 P3713

P3716

Output frequency (Hz)

3702

USER LOAD C FUNC

Action wanted during load supervision.

1 = FAULT - A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than

the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.

2 = ALARM - An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than

half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.

3703

USER LOAD C TIME

Defines the time limit for generating a fault.

• Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm.

3704

LOAD FREQ 1

Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2.

3705

LOAD TORQ LOW 1

Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1.

3706

LOAD TORQ HIGH 1

Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point.

3707

LOAD FREQ 2

Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3.

3708

LOAD TORQ LOW 2

Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2.

3709

LOAD TORQ HIGH 2

Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point.

3710

LOAD FREQ 3

Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4.

3711

LOAD TORQ LOW 3

Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3.

3712

LOAD TORQ HIGH 3

Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

167

Code

Description

3713

LOAD FREQ 4

Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5

3714

LOAD TORQ LOW 4

Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4.

3715

LOAD TORQ HIGH 4

Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point.

3716

LOAD FREQ 5

Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point.

3717

LOAD TORQ LOW 5

Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point.

• Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5.

3718

LOAD TORQ HIGH 5

Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point.

Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision

The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable

curves shown in the figure. The parameter characteristics were as described below.

• If the load drops below the

T_M

set curve for longer than

(%)

Underload curve types

the time set by parameter

3014 UNDERLOAD TIME

70%

(obsolete), the underload

protection is activated.

50%

• Curves 1…3 reach

maximum at the motor

rated frequency set by

30%

parameter 9907 MOTOR

NOM FREQ.

• T_M = nominal torque of the

motor.

2.4 · ƒ_N

ƒN

• ƒ_N = nominal frequency of

the motor.

If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in

the shaded columns, set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two

tables below:

Obsolete parameters

New parameters

Underload supervision with

3013

3014

3701

3702

3703

parameters 3013…3015 (obsolete)

UNDERLOAD

USER LOAD

FUNCTION

TIME

C MODE

C FUNC

C TIME

No underload functionality

Underload curve, fault generated

Underload curve, alarm generated

2 · t

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

169

Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID (PID1) controller.

Typically only parameters in this group are needed.

PID controller - Basic set-up

In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal (setpoint) to an actual

signal (feedback) and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two

signals. The difference between the two signals is the error value.

Typically PID control mode is used, when the speed of a motor needs to be

controlled based on pressure, flow or temperature. In most cases - when there is

only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 - only parameter group 40 is needed.

The following is a schematic of setpoint/feedback signal flow using parameter group

40.

P1101

Panel REF1

REF1

Panel REF 2

P1106

0…17,

REF2

500%

PID Setpoint

20…21

Panel REF2

-500%

G40

P4016

Current

PID1

PANEL

Torque

LOC/REM

Power

selection

P4017

P4014

P4015

LOC

Current

PID Act Value

Torque

REM

Power

P1103

Panel REF 1

P1102

G12

P1104

Const

EXT 1

P1105

Speed

Comm REF 1

EXT 2

P1106

Panel REF 2

G12

Const

Speed

Comm REF 2

P1106

Panel REF2

0…17,

P4010

PID Setpoint

P1107

AI1

20…21

P4012

P1108

AI2

P4013

Comm

Internal

G40

P4016

PID1

Current

PID1 Out

Torque

Power

P4014

P4015

P4017

PID Act Value

Current

Torque

Power

Note: In order to activate and use the PID controller, parameter 1106 must be set to

value 19.

Parameters

170

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

PID controller - Advanced

The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers:

• Process PID (PID1) and

• External PID (PID2)

Process PID (PID1) has 2 separate sets of parameters:

• Process PID (PID1) SET1, defined in Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and

• Process PID (PID1) SET2, defined in Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2

You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027.

Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor

changes considerably from one situation to another.

You can use External PID (PID2), defined in Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID, in two

different ways:

• Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, you can set outputs of the

ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. In this case, set

parameter 4230 to value 0. (0 is the default value.)

• You can use External PID (PID2) to trim or fine-tune the speed of the ACS550.

Code

Description

4001

GAIN

Defines the PID controller’s gain.

• The setting range is 0.1… 100.

• At 0.1, the PID controller output changes one-tenth as much as the error value.

• At 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value.

Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system.

• A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish

response.

If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short, the system can become unstable.

Procedure:

• Initially, set:

• 4001 GAIN = 0.1.

• 4002 INTEGRATION TIME = 20 seconds.

• Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation. If not, increase GAIN

(4001) until the actual signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to

induce this oscillation.

• Reduce GAIN (4001) until the oscillation stops.

• Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.

• Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be

necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.

• Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.

• Set INTEGRATION TIME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above value.

• If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306

FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

171

Code

Description

4002

INTEGRATION TIME

Defines the PID controller’s integration time.

Integration time is, by definition, the time required to increase the

output by the error value:

D (P 4001 = 10)

• Error value is constant and 100%.

• Gain = 1.

C (P 4001 = 1)

• Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is

achieved in 1 second.

0.0 = NOT SEL - Disables integration (I-part of controller).

P 4002

0.1…3600.0 - Integration time (seconds).

• See 4001 for adjustment procedure.

A = Error

B = Error value step

C = Controller output with Gain = 1

D = Controller output with Gain = 10

4003

DERIVATION TIME

Process error value

Error

Defines the PID controller’s derivation time.

• You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller

100%

output. The derivative is the error value’s rate of change. For

example, if the process error value changes linearly, the

derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output.

• The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time

constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV

FILTER.

0.0…10.0 - Derivation time (seconds).

PID output

D-part of controller output

Gain

P 4001

P 4003

4004

PID DERIV FILTER

Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID controller output.

• Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter.

• Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.

0.0…10.0 - Filter time constant (seconds).

4005

ERROR VALUE INV

Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed.

0 = NO - Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed. Error = Ref - Fbk

1 = YES - Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed. Error = Fbk - Ref

4006

UNITS

Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130 and 0132).

• See parameter 3405 for list of available units.

4007

UNIT SCALE

4007 value

Entry

Display

Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.

00003

• Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right end of the

00031

3.1

entry.

• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159).

00314

3.14

03142

3.142

31416

3.1416

Parameters

172

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

4008

0% VALUE

Units (P4006)

Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to

Scale (P4007)

+1000.0%

the PID controller’s actual values (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130

and 0132).

• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.

P 4009

4009

100% VALUE

Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied

to the PID controller’s actual values.

P 4008

• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.

100%

-1000.0%

Internal scale (%)

4010

SET POINT SEL

Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.

• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed (see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).

0 = KEYPAD - Control panel provides reference.

1 = AI1 - Analog input 1 provides reference.

2 = AI2 - Analog input 2 provides reference.

8 = COMM - Fieldbus provides reference.

9 = COMM+AI1 - Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input

reference correction below.

10 = COMM*AI1 - Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input

reference correction below.

11 = DI3U,4D(RNC) - Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer control, provide reference.

• DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”)

• DI4 decreases the reference (the D stands for “down”).

• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.

• R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.

• NC = Reference value is not copied.

12 = DI3U,4D(NC) - Same as DI3U,4D(RNC) above, except:

• Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate,

to the stored reference.

13 = DI5U,6D(NC) - Same as DI3U,4D(NC) above, except:

• Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6.

14 = AI1+AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

15 = AI1*AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

16 = AI1-AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

17 = AI1/AI2 - Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See

Analog input reference correction below.

19 = INTERNAL - A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference.

20 = PID2OUT - Defines PID controller 2 output (parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT) as the reference source.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

173

Code

Description

Analog input reference correction

Parameter values 9, 10 and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.

Value setting

Calculation of the AI reference

C + B

C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)

C * B

C value · (B value / 50% of reference value)

C - B

(C value + 50% of reference value) - B value

C / B

(C value · 50% of reference value) / B value

Where:

120

• C = Main reference value

17 (/)

( = COMM for values 9, 10 and

= AI1 for values 14…17)

100

• B = Correcting reference

( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and

= AI2 for values 14…17).

Example:

9, 14 (+)

The figure shows the reference source curves for

value settings 9, 10 and 14…17, where:

10, 15 (

• C = 25%.

• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.

• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.

• B varies along the horizontal axis.

16 (-)

100%

4011

INTERNAL SETPNT

Sets a constant value used for the process reference.

• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.

4012

SETPOINT MIN

Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source.

• See parameter 4010.

4013

SETPOINT MAX

Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source.

• See parameter 4010.

4014

FBK SEL

Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).

• You can define a combination of two actual values (ACT1 and ACT2) as the feedback signal.

• Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).

• Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).

1 = ACT1 - Actual value 1 (ACT1) provides the feedback signal.

2 = ACT1-ACT2 - ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

3 = ACT1+ACT2 - ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

4 = ACT1*ACT2 - ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

5 = ACT1/ACT2 - ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

6 = MIN(ACT1,2) - The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

7 = MAX(ACT1,2) - The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

8 = sqrt(ACT1-2) - Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

9 = sqA1+sqA2 - Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

10 = sqrt(ACT1) - Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal.

11 = COMM FBK 1 - Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal.

12 = COMM FBK 2 - Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal.

13 = AVE(ACT1,2) - The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal.

4015

FBK MULTIPLIER

Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014.

• Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference.

0.000 = NOT SEL - The parameter has no effect (1.000 used as the multiplier).

-32.768…32.767 - Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL.

Example: FBK = Multiplier  A1 - A2

Parameters

174

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

4016

ACT1 INPUT

Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.

1 = AI1 - Uses analog input 1 for ACT1.

2 = AI2 - Uses analog input 2 for ACT1.

3 = CURRENT - Uses current for ACT1.

4 = TORQUE - Uses torque for ACT1.

5 = POWER - Uses power for ACT1.

6 = COMM ACT 1 - Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1.

7 = COMM ACT 2 - Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1.

4017

ACT2 INPUT

Defines the source for actual value 2 (ACT2). See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM.

1 = AI1 - Uses analog input 1 for ACT2.

2 = AI2 - Uses analog input 2 for ACT2.

3 = CURRENT - Uses current for ACT2.

4 = TORQUE - Uses torque for ACT2.

5 = POWER - Uses power for ACT2.

6 = COMM ACT 1 - Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2.

7 = COMM ACT 2 - Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2.

4018

ACT1 MINIMUM

ACT1 (%)

Sets the minimum value for ACT1.

• Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 (defined

P 4019

by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter 4016 values

(COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2) scaling is not done.

Par 4016

Source

Source min.

Source max.

P 4018

Analog input 1

1301 MINIMUM AI1

1302 MAXIMUM AI1

Analog input 2

1304 MINIMUM AI2

1305 MAXIMUM AI2

Source min. Source max.

Current

2 · nominal current

Source signal

Torque

-2 · nominal torque

2 · nominal torque

Power

-2 · nominal power

2 · nominal power

ACT1 (%)

• See the figure: A= Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 MINIMUM > ACT1

P 4018

MAXIMUM)

4019

ACT1 MAXIMUM

Sets the maximum value for ACT1.

• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.

P 4019

4020

ACT2 MINIMUM

Sets the minimum value for ACT2.

Source min.

Source max.

• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.

Source signal

4021

ACT2 MAXIMUM

Sets the maximum value for ACT2.

• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.

4022

SLEEP SELECTION

Defines the control for the PID sleep function.

0 = NOT SEL- Disables the PID sleep control function.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.

• Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.

• De-activating the digital input restores PID control.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.

• See DI1 above.

7 = INTERNAL - Defines the output rpm/frequency, process reference and process actual value as the control for the

PID sleep function. Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.

• De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.

• Activating the digital input restores PID control.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.

• See DI1(INV) above.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

175

Code

Description

4023

PID SLEEP LEVEL

t < P 4024

Sets the motor speed / frequency that enables the PID sleep

function - a motor speed / frequency below this level, for at least

t > P 4024

the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep

function (stopping the drive).

P 4023

• Requires 4022 = 7 (INTERNAL).

• See the figure: A = PID output level; B = PID process feedback.

4024

PID SLEEP DELAY

Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function - a motor speed /

P 4026

Setpoint

frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period

P 4025

enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive).

• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.

4025

WAKE-UP DEV

Stop

Defines the wake-up deviation - a deviation from the setpoint

Start

greater than this value, for at least the time period 4026 WAKE-UP

DELAY, re-starts the PID controller.

• Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.

• Parameter 4005 = 0,

P 4025

}^{4005 = 1}

Wake-up level = Setpoint - Wake-up deviation.

Setpoint

• Parameter 4005 = 1,

P 4025

}4005 = 0

Wake-up level = Setpoint + Wake-up deviation.

• Wake-up level can be above or below setpoint.

See the figures:

• C = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 1

• D = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 0

• E = Feedback is above wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026

WAKE-UP DELAY - PID function wakes up.

• F = Feedback is below wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026

P 4025

WAKE-UP DELAY - PID function wakes up.

P 4026

Setpoint

4026

WAKE-UP DELAY

P 4025

Defines the wake-up delay - a deviation from the setpoint greater

than 4025 WAKE-UP DEV, for at least this time period, re-starts the

PID controller.

P 4026

Parameters

176

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

4027

PID 1 PARAM SET

Process PID (PID1) has two separate sets of parameters, PID set 1 and PID set 2.

• PID set 1 uses parameters 4001…4026.

• PID set 2 uses parameters 4101…4126.

PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected.

0 = SET 1 - PID Set 1 (parameters 4001…4026) is active.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.

• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.

• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.

• See DI1 above.

7 = SET 2 - PID Set 2 (parameters 4101…4126) is active.

8…11 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 - Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection (Timed function de-

activated = PID Set 1; Timed function activated = PID Set 2)

• See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

12 = 2-ZONE MIN - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and

feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a larger difference.

• A positive difference (a setpoint higher than the feedback) is always larger than a negative difference. This keeps

feedback values at or above the setpoint.

• Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its

setpoint.

13 = 2-ZONE MAX - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and

feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a smaller difference.

• A negative difference (a setpoint lower than the feedback) is always smaller than a positive difference. This keeps

feedback values at or below the setpoint.

• Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its

setpoint.

14 = 2-ZONE AVE - The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and

feedback 2. In addition, it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1. Therefore one

feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.

• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.

• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.

• See DI1(INV) above.

Parameters

178

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID

This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller (PID2), which

is used for the External / Trimming PID.

The operation of parameters 4201…4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1

(PID1) parameters 4001…4021.

Code

Description

4201

See 4001 …4021

…

4221

4228

ACTIVATE

Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.

• Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (NOT SEL).

0 = NOT SEL - Disables external PID control.

1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.

• Activating the digital input enables external PID control.

• De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.

• See DI1 above.

7 = DRIVE RUN - Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control.

• Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID control.

8 = ON - Defines the power-on as the control for enabling external PID control.

• Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.

9…12 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 - Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control (Timed

function active enables external PID control).

• See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.

• Activating the digital input disables external PID control.

• De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.

• See DI1(INV) above.

4229

OFFSET

Defines the offset for the PID output.

• When PID is activated, output starts from this value.

• When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.

• Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (trim mode is not active).

4230

TRIM MODE

Selects the type of trim, if any. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the trim function.

1 = PROPORTIONAL - Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm/Hz reference.

2 = DIRECT - Adds a trim factor based on the control loop’s maximum limit.

4231

TRIM SCALE

Defines the multiplier (as a percent, plus or minus) used in the trim mode.

Parameters

180

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 45: ENERGY SAVING

This group defines the setup of calculation and optimization of energy savings.

Note: The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH,

0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 are derived from

subtracting the drive's energy consumed from the direct-on-line (DOL) consumption

calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER. As such, the accuracy of

the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that

parameter.

Code

Description

4502

ENERGY PRICE

Price of energy per kWh.

• Used for reference when energy savings are calculated.

• See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178

SAVED CO2 (reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn).

4507

CO2 CONV FACTOR

Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). Used for multiplying the saved

energy in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 (reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn).

4508

PUMP POWER

Pump power (as a percentage of the nominal motor power) when connected directly to supply (DOL).

• Used for reference when energy savings are calculated.

• See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178

SAVED CO2.

• It is possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps. The reference

power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online.

4509

ENERGY RESET

Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and

0178 SAVED CO2.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

181

Group 50: ENCODER

This group defines the setup for encoder use:

• Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution.

• Enables the encoder operation.

• Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset.

See also User’s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC-01

(3AUA0000001938 [English]).

Code

Description

5001

PULSE NR

Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution (ppr).

5002

ENCODER ENABLE

Enables/disables an optional encoder.

0 = DISABLE - Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model (applies for any setting of parameter

9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE).

1 = ENABLE - Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder. This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface

Module (OTAC-01) and an encoder. Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE:

• 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED): The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque

accuracy.

• 9904 = 2 (VECTOR:TORQ): The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque

accuracy.

• 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:SPEED): The encoder provides speed feedback. (This is not closed loop speed regulation.

However, using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy.)

5003

ENCODER FAULT

Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface

module, or between the module and the drive.

1 = FAULT - The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR, and the motor coasts to a stop.

2 = ALARM - The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =

(DISABLE), that is, speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model.

5010

Z PLS ENABLE

Enables/disables the use of an encoder’s Z-pulse to define the motor shaft’s zero position. When enabled, a Z-pulse

input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft’s zero position. This function requires an encoder

that provides Z-pulse signals.

0 = DISABLE - Z-pulse input is not present or ignored if present.

1 = ENABLE - A Z-pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero.

5011

POSITION RESET

Resets the encoder’s position feedback. This parameter is self-clearing.

0 = DISABLE - Inactive.

1 = ENABLE - Resets the encoder position feedback. Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 Z PLS

ENABLE:

• 5010 = 0 (DISABLE) - Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE.

• 5010 = 1 (ENABLE) - Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS.

Parameters

182

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE

This group defines set-up variables for a fieldbus adapter (FBA) communication

module. For more information on these parameters, refer to the user’s manual

supplied with the FBA module.

Code

Description

5101

FBA TYPE

Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.

0 = NOT DEFINED - Module not found, or not properly connected, or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 (EXT FBA).

1 = PROFIBUS-DP

21 = LONWORKS

32 = CANopen

37 = DEVICENET

101 = CONTROLNET

128 = ETHERNET

132 = PROFINET

135 = EtherCAT

136 = EPL - Ethernet POWERLINK

5102

FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26

…

Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters.

5126

5127

FBA PAR REFRESH

Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.

0 = DONE - Refreshing done.

1 = REFRESH - Refreshing.

• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.

5128

FILE CPI FW REV

Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter configuration file. Format is xyz where:

• x = major revision number

• y = minor revision number

• z = correction number

Example: 107 = revision 1.07

5129

FILE CONFIG ID

Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s configuration file identification.

• File configuration information is drive application program-dependent.

5130

FILE CONFIG REV

Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module configuration file.

Example: 1 = revision 1

5131

FBA STATUS

Contains the status of the adapter module.

0 = IDLE - Adapter not configured.

1 = EXECUT INIT - Adapter is initializing.

2 = TIME OUT - A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.

3 = CONFIG ERROR - Adapter configuration error.

• The revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in

the drive’s configuration file (parameter 5132 < 5128).

4 = OFF-LINE - Adapter is off-line.

5 = ON-LINE - Adapter is on-line.

6 = RESET - Adapter is performing a hardware reset.

5132

FBA CPI FW REV

Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz where:

• x = major revision number

• y = minor revision number

• z = correction number

Example: 107 = revision 1.07

5133

FBA APPL FW REV

Contains the revision of the module’s application program. Format is xyz (see parameter 5132).

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

183

Group 52: PANEL COMM

This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.

Normally, when using the supplied control panel, there is no need to change settings

in this group.

In this group, parameter modifications take effect on the next power-up.

Code

Description

5201

STATION ID

Defines the address of the drive.

• Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.

• Range: 1…247

5202

BAUD RATE

Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second (kb/s).

9.6 kb/s

19.2 kb/s

38.4 kb/s

57.6 kb/s

115.2 kb/s

5203

PARITY

Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication.

0 = 8 NONE 1 - 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.

1 = 8 NONE 2 - 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.

2 = 8 EVEN 1 - 8 data bits, even parity, one stop bit.

3 = 8 ODD 1 - 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.

5204

OK MESSAGES

Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive.

• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.

5205

PARITY ERRORS

Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus. For high counts, check:

• Parity settings of devices connected on the bus - they must not differ.

• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.

5206

FRAME ERRORS

Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives. For high counts, check:

• Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus - they must not differ.

• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.

5207

BUFFER OVERRUNS

Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer.

• Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes.

• Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer. The excess characters are counted.

5208

CRC ERRORS

Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives. For high counts, check:

• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.

• CRC calculations for possible errors.

Parameters

184

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL

This group defines set-up variables used for an embedded fieldbus (EFB)

communication protocol. The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus. See

chapter Embedded fieldbus page 203.

Code

Description

5301

EFB PROTOCOL ID

Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.

• Format: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.

5302

EFB STATION ID

Defines the node address of the RS485 link.

• The node address on each unit must be unique.

5303

EFB BAUD RATE

Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second (kb/s).

1.2 kb/s

2.4 kb/s

4.8 kb/s

9.6 kb/s

19.2 kb/s

38.4 kb/s

57.6 kb/s

76.8 kb/s

5304

EFB PARITY

Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication.

• The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.

0 = 8 NONE 1 - 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.

1 = 8 NONE 2 - 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.

2 = 8 EVEN 1 - 8 data bits, even parity, one stop bit.

3 = 8 ODD 1 - 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.

5305

EFB CTRL PROFILE

Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol.

0 = ABB DRV LIM - Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS400.

1 = DCU PROFILE - Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.

2 = ABB DRV FULL - Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS600/800.

5306

EFB OK MESSAGES

Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.

• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.

5307

EFB CRC ERRORS

Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive. For high counts, check:

• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels - high noise levels generate errors.

• CRC calculations for possible errors.

5308

EFB UART ERRORS

Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive.

5309

EFB STATUS

Contains the status of the EFB protocol.

0 = IDLE - EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages.

1 = EXECUT INIT - EFB protocol is initializing.

2 = TIME OUT - A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol.

3 = CONFIG ERROR - EFB protocol has a configuration error.

4 = OFF-LINE - EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive.

5 = ON-LINE - EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive.

6 = RESET - EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset.

7 = LISTEN ONLY - EFB protocol is in listen-only mode.

5310

EFB PAR 10

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

185

Code

Description

5311

EFB PAR 11

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006.

5312

EFB PAR 12

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007.

5313

EFB PAR 13

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008.

5314

EFB PAR 14

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009.

5315

EFB PAR 15

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010.

5316

EFB PAR 16

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011.

5317

EFB PAR 17

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012.

5318

EFB PAR 18

For Modbus: Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master

request.

5319

EFB PAR 19

ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Control Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word.

5320

EFB PAR 20

ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Status Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word.

Parameters

186

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Group 64: LOAD ANALYZER

This group defines the load analyzer, which can be used for analyzing the

customer’s process and sizing the drive and the motor.

The peak value is logged at 2 ms level, and the distribution loggers are updated on

0.2 s (200 ms) time level. Three different values can be logged.

1. Amplitude logger 1: The measured current is logged continuously. The

distribution as a percentage of the nominal current I_2N is shown in ten classes.

2. Peak value logger: One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak (maximum)

value. The peak value of the signal, peak time (time when the peak value was

detected) as well the frequency, current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown.

3. Amplitude logger 2: One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude

distribution. The base value (100% value) can be set by the user.

The first logger cannot be reset. The other two loggers can be reset by a user-

defined method. They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter

time is changed.

Code

Description

6401

PVL SIGNAL

Defines (by number) the signal logged for the peak value.

• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be selected. Eg 102 = parameter 0102 SPEED.

100 = NOT SELECTED - No signal (parameter) logged for the peak value.

101…178 - Logs parameter 0101…0178.

6402

PVL FILTER TIME

Defines the filter time for peak value logging.

•

0.0…120.0 - Filter time (seconds).

6403

LOGGERS RESET

Defines the source for the reset of peak value logger and amplitude logger 2.

0 = NOT SEL - No reset selected.

1 = DI1 - Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI1.

2…6 = DI2…DI6 - Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI2…DI6.

7 = RESET - Reset loggers. Parameter is set to NOT SEL.

-1 = DI1(INV) - Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI1.

-2…-6 = DI2(INV) …DI6(INV) - Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI2…DI6.

6404

AL2 SIGNAL

Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2.

• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be selected. Eg 102 = parameter 0102 SPEED.

100 = NOT SELECTED - No signal (parameter) logged for amplitude distribution (amplitude logger 2).

101…178 - Logs parameter 0101…0178.

6405

AL2 SIGNAL BASE

Defines the base value from which the percentage distribution is calculated.

• Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL.

6406

PEAK VALUE

Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL.

6407

PEAK TIME 1

Date of the peak value detection.

• Format: Date if the real time clock is operating (dd.mm.yy). / The number of days elapsed after the power-on if the

real time clock is not used, or was not set (xx d).

6408

PEAK TIME 2

Time of the peak value detection.

• Format: hours:minutes:seconds.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

187

Code

Description

6409

CURRENT AT PEAK

Current at the moment of the peak value (amperes).

6410

UDC AT PEAK

DC voltage at the moment of the peak value (volts).

6411

FREQ AT PEAK

Output frequency at the moment of the peak value (herzes).

6412

TIME OF RESET 1

Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2.

• Format: Date if the real time clock is operating (dd.mm.yy). / The number of days elapsed after the power-on if the

real time clock is not used, or was not set (xx d).

6413

TIME OF RESET 2

Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2.

• Format: hours:minutes:seconds.

6414

AL1RANGE0TO10

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 0…10% distribution.

6415

AL1RANGE10TO20

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 10…20% distribution.

6416

AL1RANGE20TO30

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 20…30% distribution.

6417

AL1RANGE30TO40

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 30…40% distribution.

6418

AL1RANGE40TO50

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 40…50% distribution.

6419

AL1RANGE50TO60

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 50…60% distribution.

6420

AL1RANGE60TO70

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 60…70% distribution.

6421

AL1RANGE70TO80

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 70…80% distribution.

6422

AL1RANGE80TO90

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) 80…90% distribution.

6423

AL1RANGE90TO

Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I_2N) over 90% distribution.

6424

AL2RANGE0TO10

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 0…10% distribution.

6425

AL2RANGE10TO20

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 10…20% distribution.

6426

AL2RANGE20TO30

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 20…30% distribution.

6427

AL2RANGE30TO40

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 30…40% distribution.

6428

AL2RANGE40TO50

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 40…50% distribution.

6429

AL2RANGE50TO60

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 50…60% distribution.

6430

AL2RANGE60TO70

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 60…70% distribution.

6431

AL2RANGE70TO80

Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 70…80% distribution.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

189

Group 81: PFC CONTROL

This group defines a Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode of operation. The major

features of PFC control are:

•

The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no. 1, varying the motor speed to control

the pump capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.

•

Direct line connections power the motor of pump no. 2 and pump no.3, etc. The

ACS550 switches pump no. 2 (and then pump no. 3, etc.) on and off as needed.

These motors are auxiliary motors.

•

The ACS550 PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual

value feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first

pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.

•

When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s

capacity (user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts

an auxiliary pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account

for the auxiliary pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller

adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows

the process reference. If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional

auxiliary pumps, using the same process.

•

When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit

(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically stops an

auxiliary pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for

the auxiliary pump’s missing output.

•

An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and

the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.

•

An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)

equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically

increments the position of each motor in the rotation - the speed regulated motor

becomes the last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed

regulated motor, etc.

Code

Description

8103

REFERENCE STEP 1

Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.

• Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is running.

• Default value is 0%.

Example: An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe.

•

4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.

• The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels.

• As water consumption increases, first one constant speed pump operates, then, the second.

• As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input

end. As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely

match the output pressure.

• When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.

• When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter

8104 REFERENCE STEP 2.

• When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter

8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.

Parameters

190

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

8104

REFERENCE STEP 2

Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.

• Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.

• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.

8105

REFERENCE STEP 3

Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.

• Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.

• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.

8109

START FREQ 1

Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor starts if:

• No auxiliary motors are running.

f (Hz)

• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit:

P 8115

8109 + 1 Hz.

• Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit

fMAX

(8109 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.

(P 8109)+1

After the first auxiliary motor starts:

P 8109

• Output frequency decreases by the value =

(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).

P 8112

• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to

compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor.

fMIN

See the figure, where:

• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)

• B = Output frequency increase during the start delay.

• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency

increases (1 = On).

Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:

•

8112 LOW FREQ 1

•

(2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.

8110

START FREQ 2

Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.

• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

The second auxiliary motor starts if:

• One auxiliary motor is running.

• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8110 + 1.

• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.

8111

START FREQ 3

Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor.

• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

The third auxiliary motor starts if:

• Two auxiliary motors are running.

• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8111 + 1 Hz.

• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

191

Code

Description

8112

LOW FREQ 1

Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor stops if:

• Only one (the first) auxiliary motor is running.

f (Hz)

• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit:

8112 - 1.

• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit

P 8109

(8112 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.

f_MAX

After the first auxiliary motor stops:

• Output frequency increases by the value =

P 8112

(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).

(P 8112)-1

• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases to

compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor.

fMIN

See the figure, where:

• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)

P 8116

• B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.

• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency

decreases (1 = On).

• Grey path = Shows hysteresis - if time is reversed, the path

backwards is not the same. For details on the path for starting,

see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.

Note: 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between:

•

(2007 MINIMUM FREQ) +1.

•

8109 START FREQ 1

8113

LOW FREQ 2

Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor.

• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

The second auxiliary motor stops if:

• Two auxiliary motors are running.

• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8113 - 1.

• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.

8114

LOW FREQ 3

Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor.

• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

The third auxiliary motor stops if:

• Three auxiliary motors are running.

• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1.

• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.

8115

AUX MOT START D

Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.

• The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110, or 8111) for this time

period before the auxiliary motor starts.

• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

8116

AUX MOT STOP D

Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.

• The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit (parameter 8112, 8113, or 8114) for this time

period before the auxiliary motor stops.

• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

Parameters

192

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

8117

NR OF AUX MOT

Sets the number of auxiliary motors.

• Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals.

• The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor.

• The following describes the set-up of the required relay outputs.

Relay outputs

As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The

following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays.

• The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1…RO3.

• An external digital output module (OREL-01) can be added to provide relay outputs RO4…RO6.

• Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 define, respectively, how relays RO1…RO6 are used - the parameter

value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC.

• The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first

auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on. If the

Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate. Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to

the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay

with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on.

Relay logic

ACS550

Standard PFC mode

PFC with Autochange mode

• The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low frequency and start frequency values as the third

auxiliary motor.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

193

Code

Description

•

The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output

parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and

where the Autochange function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0).

Parameter setting

ACS550 Relay assignment

Autochange disabled

RO1

RO2

RO3

RO4

RO5

RO6

Aux.

* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use. One motor is in “sleep”

when the other is rotating.

•

The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output

parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and

where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = value > 0.0).

Parameter setting

ACS550 Relay assignment

Autochange enabled

RO1

RO2

RO3

RO4

RO5

RO6

PFC

0**

PFC

** = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use. Working as a

standard PID-control.

8118

AUTOCHNG INTERV

Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the

Relay logic

interval between changes.

ACS550

• The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when

the speed regulated motor is running.

• See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the

Autochange function.

• The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is

performed.

• Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS =

value > 0.

-0.1 = TEST MODE - Forces the interval to value 36…48 s.

0.0 = NOT SEL - Disables the Autochange function.

0.1…336 - The operating time interval (the time when the start

signal is on) between automatic motor changes.

WARNING! When enabled, the Autochange function

requires the interlocks (8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0)

enabled. During autochange the power output is

interrupted and the drive coasts to stop, preventing

damage to the contacts.

PFC with Autochange mode

Parameters

194

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

8119

AUTOCHNG LEVEL

Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFC

control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this parameter to deny autochange when

the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.

Autochange overview

The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At each

autochange operation:

• A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output - the speed regulated motor.

• The starting order of the other motors rotates.

The Autochange function requires:

• External switchgear for changing the drive’s output power connections.

• Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0.

Autochange is performed when:

• The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.

• The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter, 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.

Note: The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed.

In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the

PID output

following (see the figure):

4PFC

• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last

100%

autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and PFC

2PFC

input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.

• Stops the speed regulated motor.

P 8119

3PFC

• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor.

3PFC

• Increments the starting order counter, to change the

4PFC

starting order for the motors.

2PFC

• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated

1PFC

motor.

• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was

P 8122

running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.

P 8118

• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated

motor. The autochange switchgear connects this motor to

the ACS550 power output.

A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL -

• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY.

autochange not allowed.

• Starts the speed regulated motor.

B = Autochange occurs.

• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation.

1PFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.

• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed

regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed

motor) - This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange.

• Continues with normal PFC operation.

Starting order counter

Output

frequency

The operation of the starting-order counter:

No aux

1 aux

2 aux

• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and

motors

motor

motors

1410…1412) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest

fMAX

parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the relay

connected to 1PFC, the first motor, and so on.)

• Initially, 1PFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st auxiliary

motor, etc.

• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC = speed

regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, …, 1PFC = last

auxiliary motor.

Area

• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on.

Autochange

• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all

is allowed

PID output

inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm

P 8119

100%

(2015, PFC I LOCK).

• When ACS550 power supply is switched off, the counter

preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory. When power is restored, the

Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory.

• If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC enable value is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the first

bullet above.)

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

195

Code

Description

8120

INTERLOCKS

Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the Interlock function is enabled:

• An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.

• An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present.

• The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor’s interlock is active - the

control panel displays an alarm (2015, PFC I LOCK).

Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:

• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the Interlock circuit - the drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that

the motor is switched off and start the next available motor.

• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input - the

drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.

0 = NOT SEL - Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are available for other purposes.

• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0 (The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is

disabled.)

1 = DI1 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each

PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]

• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

(P 8118)

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

Not allowed

DI2…DI6: Free

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI2…DI6: Free

DI3…DI6: Free

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI2: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI3…DI6: Free

DI4…DI6: Free

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI2: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI4…DI6: Free

DI5…DI6: Free

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI2: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Fourth PFC Relay

DI5: Fourth PFC Relay

DI5…DI6: Free

DI6: Free

DI1: Speed Reg Motor

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI2: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Fourth PFC Relay

DI5: Fourth PFC Relay

DI5: Fifth PFC Relay

DI6: Fifth PFC Relay

DI6: Free

Not allowed

DI1: First PFC Relay

DI2: Second PFC Relay

DI3: Third PFC Relay

DI4: Fourth PFC Relay

DI5: Fifth PFC Relay

DI6: Sixth PFC Relay

Parameters

196

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

2 = DI2 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI2) to the interlock signal for each

PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]

• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

(P 8118)

DI1: Free

Not allowed

DI2: Speed Reg Motor

DI3…DI6: Free

DI1: Free

DI2: Speed Reg Motor

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI3…DI6: Free

DI4…DI6: Free

DI1: Free

DI2: Speed Reg Motor

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI4…DI6: Free

DI5…DI6: Free

DI1: Free

DI2: Speed Reg Motor

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI5: Third PFC Relay

DI5…DI6: Free

DI6: Free

DI1: Free

DI2: Speed Reg Motor

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI5: Third PFC Relay

DI5: Fourth PFC Relay

DI6: Fourth PFC Relay

DI6: Free

Not allowed

DI1: Free

DI2: First PFC Relay

DI3: Second PFC Relay

DI4: Third PFC Relay

DI5: Fourth PFC Relay

DI6: Fifth PFC Relay

Not allowed

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

197

Code

Description

3 = DI3 - Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI3) to the interlock signal for each

PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]

• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

(P 8118)

DI1…DI2: Free

Not allowed

DI3: Speed Reg Motor

DI4…DI6: Free

DI1…DI2: Free

DI3: Speed Reg Motor

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI4…DI6: Free

DI5…DI6: Free

DI1…DI2: Free

DI3: Speed Reg Motor

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI5: Second PFC Relay

DI5…DI6: Free

DI6: Free

DI1…DI2: Free

DI3: Speed Reg Motor

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI5: Second PFC Relay

DI5: Third PFC Relay

DI6: Third PFC Relay

DI6: Free

Not allowed

DI1…DI2: Free

DI3: First PFC Relay

DI4: Second PFC Relay

DI5: Third PFC Relay

DI6: Fourth PFC Relay

5…6

Not allowed

4 = DI4 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI4) to the interlock signal for each

PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]

• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

(P 8118)

DI1…DI3: Free

Not allowed

DI4: Speed Reg Motor

DI5…DI6: Free

DI1…DI3: Free

DI4: Speed Reg Motor

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI5: First PFC Relay

DI5…DI6: Free

DI6: Free

DI1…DI3: Free

DI4: Speed Reg Motor

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI5: First PFC Relay

DI5: Second PFC Relay

DI6: Second PFC Relay

DI6: Free

Not allowed

DI1…DI3: Free

DI4: First PFC Relay

DI5: Second PFC Relay

DI6: Third PFC Relay

4…6

Not allowed

Parameters

198

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

5 = DI5 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI5) to the interlock signal for each

PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:

• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]

• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

(P 8118)

DI1…DI4: Free

Not allowed

DI5: Speed Reg Motor

DI6: Free

DI1…DI4: Free

DI5: Speed Reg Motor

DI5: First PFC Relay

DI6: First PFC Relay

DI6: Free

Not allowed

DI1…DI4: Free

DI5: First PFC Relay

DI6: Second PFC Relay

3…6

Not allowed

6 = DI6 - Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated

motor.

• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0.

No. PFC

Autochange disabled

Autochange enabled

relays

DI1…DI5: Free

Not allowed

DI6: Speed Reg Motor

Not allowed

DI1…DI5: Free

DI6: First PFC Relay

2…6

Not allowed

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

199

Code

Description

8121

REG BYPASS CTRL

Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled, Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control mechanism

without a PID regulator.

• Use Regulator by-pass control only in special

f_OUT

applications.

0 = NO - Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive

f_MAX

uses the normal PFC reference: 1106 REF2 SELECT.

1 = YES - Enables Regulator by-pass control.

• The process PID regulator is bypassed.

Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference

P 8110

(input). Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC

P 8109

reference.

• The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014

FBK SEL (or 4114) for the PFC frequency reference.

• The figure shows the relation between the control

P 8113

signal 4014 FBK SEL (OR 4114) and the speed

P 8112

regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor

system.

f_MIN

Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s

P 4014

outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A).

(%)

A = No auxiliary motors running

B = One auxiliary motor running

Mains 3~

Contactors

C = Two auxiliary motors running

ACS550

Outlet pipe1

Sewage

tank

Outlet pipe2

Inlet pipe

Outlet pipe3

8122

PFC START DELAY

Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:

• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor - connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output.

• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY.

• Starts the speed regulated motor.

• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.

WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFC Start Delay.

• After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on, the star-delta starter must switch to the star-connection and

then back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.

• So, the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star-delta starter.

8123

PFC ENABLE

Selects PFC control. When enabled, PFC control:

• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109

START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency.

• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed regulated

motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken off line.

• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.

• Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).

0 = NOT SEL - Disables PFC control.

1 = ACTIVE - Enables PFC control.

Parameters

200

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Code

Description

8124

ACC IN AUX STOP

Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum

fOUT

frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramp:

• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary

motor is switched off.

• Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22:

ACCEL/DECEL.

• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor

increases by an amount equal to the output of the

P 8125

P 8124

switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp

defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.

Aux.

0 = NOT SEL.

motor

0.1…1800 - Activates this function using the value

entered as the acceleration time.

8125

DEC IN AUX START

Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero

•

A = speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22:

frequency ramp. This PFC deceleration ramp:

ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2202 or 2205).

• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary

•

B = speed regulated motor decelerating using Group

motor is switched on.

22: ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2203 or 2206).

• Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22:

•

At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates

ACCEL/DECEL.

using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.

• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor

•

At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates

decreases by an amount equal to the output of the

using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.

auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in

Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.

0 = NOT SEL.

0.1…1800 - Activates this function using the value

entered as the deceleration time.

8126

TIMED AUTOCHNG

Sets the autochange using a Timed function. See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.

0 = NOT SEL.

1 = TIMED FUNC 1 - Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active.

2…4 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 - Enables autochange when Timed function 2…4 is active.

8127

MOTORS

Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum 7 motors, 1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line

and 3 spare motors).

• This value includes also the speed regulated motor.

• This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used.

• If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to

PFC but it needs to be included in this value.

8128

AUX START ORDER

Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors.

1 = EVEN RUNTIME - Time sharing is active. Evens out the cumulative run time of the auxiliary motors. The start order

depends on the run time: The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is shortest is started first, then the motor

whose cumulative run time is the second shortest etc. When the demand drops, the first motor to be stopped is the

one whose cumulative run time is longest.

2 = RELAY ORDER - The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays.

Parameters

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

203

Embedded fieldbus

Overview

The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard

serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can

either:

• receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or

• be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available

control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.

Fieldbus controller

Fieldbus

Other devices

Connect using either:

• standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at

terminals X1:28…32

• fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted

in slot 2 (option Rxxx).

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• embedded fieldbus (EFB) - Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1:28…32 on

the control board, a control system can communicate with the drive using the

Modbus® protocol. (For protocol and profile descriptions, see sections Modbus

protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this

chapter.)

• fieldbus adapter (FBA) - See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 237.

Control interface

In general, the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of:

• Output words

- Control Word

- Reference1

- Reference2

• Input words

- Status Word

- Actual value 1

- Actual value 2

Embedded fieldbus

204

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

- Actual value 3

- Actual value 4

- Actual value 5

- Actual value 6

- Actual value 7

- Actual value 8

The content of these words is defined by profiles. For details on the profiles used,

sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.

Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller

point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller

to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

Planning

Network planning should address the following questions:

• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?

• What control information must be sent down to the drives?

• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling

system?

Mechanical and electrical installation - EFB

WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from

the power source.

Drive terminals 28…32 are for RS485 communications.

• Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable

with a wave impedance of 120 ohm.

• Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link. Use this pair to

connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.

• Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground (terminal 31), leaving

one wire unused.

• Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point. Ground all devices on the

network using their corresponding earthing terminals.

• As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the

devices should be earthed to a common ground.

• Connect the RS485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

205

• To reduce noise on the network, terminate the RS485 network using 120 

resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect

the termination resistors. See the following diagram.

Terminated

station

Station

station

Drive RS485:

Terminal block X1

See

Note 1

See Note 2: Shield

Notes:

ld make the

1. Set switch J2 to OFF. ON position wou

See Note 3:

network active (pull up & pull down [BIAS] resistors

Ground

are on board the drive).

See Note 4: Reference/

2. Tie shield wires together at the drive - Do NOT

terminate at SCR.

Common

3. Terminate the shield ONLY at the “Ground” terminal

in the controller.

Controller

4. Terminate the AGND wire at the “Reference”

terminal in the controller.

• For configuration information see the following sections:

- Communication set-up - EFB on page 205

- Activate drive control functions - EFB on page 207

- The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data. For example, Modbus

protocol technical data on page 215.

Communication set-up - EFB

Serial communication selection

To activate the serial communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL =

(STD MODBUS).

Note: If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have

that protocol software in the application memory.

Embedded fieldbus

206

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that

define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined

below. In particular, note that the station Id may require adjustment.

Protocol reference

Code

Description

Modbus

5301

EFB PROTOCOL ID

Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered

for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL,

Contains the identification and program revision of

sets this parameter automatically. The

the protocol.

format is: XXYY, where XX = protocol ID,

and YY = program revision.

5302

EFB STATION ID

Set each drive on the network with a

unique value for this parameter.

Defines the node address of the RS485 link.

When this protocol is selected, the

default value for this parameter is: 1

Note: For a new address to take affect, the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be

set to 0 before selecting a new address. Leaving 5302 = 0 places the RS485 channel in reset,

disabling communication.

5303

EFB BAUD RATE

When this protocol is selected, the

default value for this parameter is: 9.6

Defines the communication speed of the RS485

link in kbits per second (kbits/s).

1.2 kb/s

19.2 kb/s

2.4 kb/s

38.4 kb/s

4.8 kb/s

57.6 kb/s

9.6 kb/s

76.8 kb/s

5304

EFB PARITY

When this protocol is selected, the

default value for this parameter is: 1

Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be

used with the RS485 communication.

• The same settings must be used in all on-line

stations.

0 = 8 NONE 1 - 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.

1 = 8 NONE 2 - 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.

2 = 8 EVEN 1 - 8 data bits, even parity, one stop bit.

3 = 8 ODD 1 - 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.

5305

EFB CTRL PROFILE

When this protocol is selected, the

default value for this parameter is: 0

Selects the communication profile used by the

EFB protocol.

0 = ABB DRV LIM - Operation of Control/Status

Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used

in ACS400.

1 = DCU PROFILE - Operation of Control/Status

Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.

2 = ABB DRV FULL - Operation of Control/Status

Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used

in ACS600/800.

Note: After any changes to the communication settings, the protocol must be

reactivated by either cycling the drive power, or by clearing and then restoring the

station Id (5302).

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

207

Activate drive control functions - EFB

Controlling the drive

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:

• tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function

• define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control

• define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.

The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for

each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the document supplied

with the FBA module.

Start/Stop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location

is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Modbus¹protocol reference

Drive parameter

Value

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

1001

EXT1 COMMANDS

10 (COMM)

Start/Stop by fieldbus

40001 bits 0…3

40031 bits 0, 1

with Ext1 selected.

1002

EXT2 COMMANDS

10 (COMM)

Start/Stop by fieldbus

40001 bits 0…3

40031 bits 0, 1

with Ext2 selected.

1003

DIRECTION

3 (REQUEST)

Direction by fieldbus.

4002/4003²

40031 bit 3

¹ For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in these

tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5305 = 0 (ABB DRV

LIM) or 5305 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when

parameter 5305 = 1 (DCU PROFILE). See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.

² The reference provides direction control - a negative reference provides reverse rotation.

Embedded fieldbus

208

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Modbus protocol

reference

Drive parameter

Value

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

8 (COMM)

Reference set selection by fieldbus.

40001 bit 11

40031 bit 5

1103

REF1 SELECT

8 (COMM)

Input reference 1 by fieldbus.

40002

1106

REF2 SELECT

8 (COMM)

Input reference 2 by fieldbus.

40003

Reference Scaling

Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:

• Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 215

• Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.

Miscellaneous drive control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location

is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Modbus protocol

reference

Drive parameter

Value

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

1601

RUN ENABLE

7 (COMM)

Run enable by fieldbus.

40001 bit 3

40031 bit 6

(inverted)

1604

FAULT RESET SEL

8 (COMM)

Fault reset by fieldbus.

40001 bit 7

40031 bit 4

1606

LOCAL LOCK

8 (COMM)

Source for local lock selection is

Does not

40031 bit 14

the fieldbus.

apply

1607

PARAM SAVE

1 (SAVE)

Saves altered parameters to

41607

memory (then value returns to 0).

1608

START ENABLE 1

7 (COMM)

Source for start enable 1 is the

Does not

40032 bit 2

fieldbus Command word.

apply.

1609

START ENABLE 2

7 (COMM)

Source for start enable 2 is the

40032 bit 3

fieldbus Command word.

2013

MIN TORQUE SEL

7 (COMM)

Source for minimum torque

40031 bit 15

selection is the fieldbus.

2014

MAX TORQUE SEL

7 (COMM)

Source for maximum torque

selection is the fieldbus.

2201

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

7 (COMM)

Source for ramp pair selection is

40031 bit 10

the fieldbus.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

209

Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate

location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol

dependent.)

Modbus protocol reference

Drive parameter

Value

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 1 controlled

40134 bit 0 or 00033

by fieldbus.

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 2 controlled

40134 bit 1 or 00034

by fieldbus.

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 3 controlled

40134 bit 2 or 00035

by fieldbus.

1410¹

RELAY OUTPUT 4

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 4 controlled

40134 bit 3 or 00036

by fieldbus.

1411¹

RELAY OUTPUT 5

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 5 controlled

40134 bit 4 or 00037

by fieldbus.

1412¹

RELAY OUTPUT 6

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 6 controlled

40134 bit 5 or 00038

by fieldbus.

¹ More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Modbus protocol

reference

Drive parameter

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

0122

RO 1-3 STATUS

Relay 1…3 status.

40122

0123

RO 4-6 STATUS

Relay 4…6 status.

40123

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Modbus protocol

reference

Drive parameter

Value

Description

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

135 (COMM VALUE 1)

Analog Output 1

controlled by writing to

0135

COMM VALUE 1

40135

parameter 0135.

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

136 (COMM VALUE 2)

Analog Output 2

controlled by writing to

0136

COMM VALUE 2

40136

parameter 0136.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

211

Feedback from the drive - EFB

Pre-defined feedback

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the

protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists

a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/object

listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 215.

Modbus protocol reference

Drive parameter

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

0102

SPEED

40102

0103

OUTPUT FREQ

40103

0104

CURRENT

40104

0105

TORQUE

40105

0106

POWER

40106

0107

DC BUS VOLTAGE

40107

0109

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

40109

0301

FB CMD WORD1 - bit 0 (STOP)

40301 bit 0

0301

FB CMD WORD1 1 - bit 2 (REV)

40301 bit 2

0118

DI 1-3 STATUS - bit 0 (DI3)

40118

Note: With Modbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format: “4” followed

by the parameter number.

Actual value scaling

The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent. In general, for Actual

Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See section

Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions.) For example:

Feedback

Parameter

(Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) = Scaled value

integer

resolution

0.1 mA

1·

0.1 mA = 0.1 mA

0.1%

10 · 0.1% = 1%

Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameter descriptions section

specifies what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from

percent to engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines

100% and divide by 100%.

Embedded fieldbus

212

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

For example:

Value of the

Feedback

Parameter

(Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) ·

parameter that

integer

resolution

(Value of 100% ref.) / 100% = Scaled value

defines 100%

0.1%

1500 rpm¹

10 · 0.1% · 1500 RPM

100% = 15 rpm

100

0.1%

500 Hz²

100 · 0.1% · 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz

¹ Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED

as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.

² Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ

as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.

Diagnostics - EFB

Fault queue for drive diagnostics

For general ACS550 diagnostics information, see chapter Diagnostics on page 259.

The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below.

Modbus protocol reference

Drive parameter

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

0401

LAST FAULT

40401

0412

PREVIOUS FAULT 1

40412

0413

PREVIOUS FAULT 2

40413

Serial communication diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:

• loose connections

• incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)

• bad grounding

• duplicate station numbers

• incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network.

The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53:

EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306…5309. Section Complete parameter

descriptions on page 106 describes these parameters in detail.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

213

Diagnostic situations

The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations - the problem

symptoms and corrective actions.

Normal operation

During normal network operation, 5306…5309 parameter values act as follows at

each drive:

•

5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each message properly received

and addressed to this drive).

•

5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid

message CRC is received).

•

5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format

errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).

•

5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic.

Loss of communication

The ACS550 behavior, if communication is lost, was configured earlier in section

Communication fault on page 210. The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and

3019 COMM FAULT TIME. Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106

describes these parameters in detail.

No master station on line

If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5307 EFB

CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the stations.

To correct:

• Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the

network.

• Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited.

Duplicate stations

If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:

• Two or more drives cannot be addressed.

• Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5307 EFB

CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances.

To correct: Verify the station numbers of all stations. Change conflicting station

numbers.

Swapped wires

If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to

terminal B on another):

• The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.

• The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing.

To correct: Check that the RS-485 lines are not swapped.

Embedded fieldbus

214

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Fault 28 - Serial 1 Err

If the drive’s control panel shows fault code 28, SERIAL 1 ERR, check for either of the

following:

• The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.

• The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication

connection at the drive.

• The time-out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation. The

master is not polling the drive within the specified time-out delay. To correct,

increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME.

Faults 31…33 - EFB1…EFB3

The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 259

(fault codes 31…33) are not used.

Intermittent off-line occurrences

The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with

ACS550 serial communication. Intermittent problems might also be caused by:

• marginally loose connections

• wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations

• insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the

communication cables.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

215

Modbus protocol technical data

Overview

The Modbus® protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control

environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use

and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto

standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.

Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a

single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-

point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common

implementation features a multi-drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling

multiple Slaves. The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface.

RTU

The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.

The ACS550 supports RTU only.

Feature summary

The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550.

Function

Code (Hex)

Description

Read Coil Status

0x01

Read discrete output status. For the ACS550, the individual bits

of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are

mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).

Read Discrete Input

0x02

Read discrete inputs status. For the ACS550, the individual bits

Status

of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1…16 or 1…32,

depending on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped

sequentially beginning with Input 33 (e.g. DI1=Input 33).

Read Multiple

0x03

Read multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire

Holding Registers

parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as

command, status and reference values.

Read Multiple Input

0x04

Read multiple input registers. For the ACS550, the 2 analog input

Registers

channels are mapped as input registers 1 & 2.

Force Single Coil

0x05

Write a single discrete output. For the ACS550, the individual bits

of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are

mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).

Write Single

0x06

Write single holding register. For the ACS550, the entire

Holding Register

parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as

command, status and reference values.

Diagnostics

0x08

Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00),

Restart (0x01) & Listen Only (0x04) are supported.

Force Multiple Coils

0x0F

Write multiple discrete outputs. For the ACS550, the individual

bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs

are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil

33).

Write Multiple

0x10

Write multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire

Holding Registers

parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as

command, status and reference values.

Read/Write Multiple

0x17

This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single

Holding Registers

command.

Embedded fieldbus

216

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Mapping summary

The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 (parameters and

I/0) and Modbus reference space. For details, see Modbus addressing below.

ACS550

Modbus reference

Supported function codes

• Control Bits

Coils(0xxxx)

•

01 - Read Coil Status

• Relay Outputs

•

05 - Force Single Coil

•

15 - Force Multiple Coils

• Status Bits

Discrete Inputs(1xxxx)

•

02 - Read Input Status

• Discrete Inputs

• Analog Inputs

Input Registers(3xxxxx)

•

04 - Read Input Registers

• Parameters

Holding Registers(4xxxx)

•

03 - Read 4X Registers

• Control/Status Words

•

06 - Preset Single 4X Register

• References

•

16 - Preset Multiple 4X Registers

•

23 - Read/Write 4X Registers

Communication profiles

When communicating by Modbus, the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control

and status information. Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used.

• ABB DRV LIM - The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile. This

implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with

ACS400 drives. The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface. It is

discussed in detail in the following sections.

• DCU PROFILE - The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to

32 bits. It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the

embedded fieldbus environment.

• ABB DRV FULL - ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that

standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives. This

implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM

implementation.

Modbus addressing

With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.

Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.

Note: The ACS550 supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus

specification. Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message.

Similarly, coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.

Refer again to the Mapping summary above. The following sections describe, in

detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.

0xxxx Mapping - Modbus coils. The drive maps the following information to the

0xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:

• bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL

PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

217

• relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.

The following table summarizes the 0xxxx reference set:

Modbus

Internal location

ABB DRV LIM

DCU PROFILE

ABB DRV FULL

ref.

(all profiles)

(5305 = 0)

(5305 = 1)

(5305 = 2)

00001

CONTROL WORD - Bit 0

OFF1¹

STOP

OFF1¹

00002

CONTROL WORD - Bit 1

OFF2¹

START

OFF2¹

00003

CONTROL WORD - Bit 2

OFF3¹

REVERSE

OFF3¹

00004

CONTROL WORD - Bit 3

START

LOCAL

START

00005

CONTROL WORD - Bit 4

N/A

RESET

RAMP_OUT_ZERO¹

00006

CONTROL WORD - Bit 5

RAMP_HOLD¹

EXT2

RAMP_HOLD¹

00007

CONTROL WORD - Bit 6

RAMP_IN_ZERO¹

RUN_DISABLE

RAMP_IN_ZERO¹

00008

CONTROL WORD - Bit 7

RESET

STPMODE_R

RESET

00009

CONTROL WORD - Bit 8

N/A

STPMODE_EM

N/A

00010

CONTROL WORD - Bit 9

N/A

STPMODE_C

N/A

00011

CONTROL WORD - Bit 10

N/A

RAMP_2

REMOTE_CMD¹

00012

CONTROL WORD - Bit 11

EXT2

RAMP_OUT_0

EXT2

00013

CONTROL WORD - Bit 12

N/A

RAMP_HOLD

N/A

00014

CONTROL WORD - Bit 13

N/A

RAMP_IN_0

N/A

00015

CONTROL WORD - Bit 14

N/A

REQ_LOCALLOCK

N/A

00016

CONTROL WORD - Bit 15

N/A

TORQLIM2

N/A

00017

CONTROL WORD - Bit 16

Does not apply

FBLOCAL_CTL

Does not apply

00018

CONTROL WORD - Bit 17

FBLOCAL_REF

00019

CONTROL WORD - Bit 18

START_DISABLE1

00020

CONTROL WORD - Bit 19

START_DISABLE2

00021…

Reserved

00032

00033

RELAY OUTPUT 1

Relay Output 1

00034

RELAY OUTPUT 2

Relay Output 2

00035

RELAY OUTPUT 3

Relay Output 3

00036

RELAY OUTPUT 4

Relay Output 4

00037

RELAY OUTPUT 5

Relay Output 5

00038

RELAY OUTPUT 6

Relay Output 6

¹ = Active low

For the 0xxxx registers:

• Status is always readable.

• Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control.

• Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.

Embedded fieldbus

218

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:

Function code

Description

Read coil status

Force single coil

15 (0x0F Hex)

Force multiple coils

1xxxx Mapping - Modbus discrete inputs. The drive maps the following

information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:

• bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL

PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.

• discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.

The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set:

Modbus

Internal location

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

ref.

(all profiles)

(5305 = 0 OR 2)

(5305 = 1)

10001

STATUS WORD - Bit 0

RDY_ON

READY

10002

STATUS WORD - Bit 1

RDY_RUN

ENABLED

10003

STATUS WORD - Bit 2

RDY_REF

STARTED

10004

STATUS WORD - Bit 3

TRIPPED

RUNNING

10005

STATUS WORD - Bit 4

OFF_2_STA¹

ZERO_SPEED

10006

STATUS WORD - Bit 5

OFF_3_STA¹

ACCELERATE

10007

STATUS WORD - Bit 6

SWC_ON_INHIB

DECELERATE

10008

STATUS WORD - Bit 7

ALARM

AT_SETPOINT

10009

STATUS WORD - Bit 8

AT_SETPOINT

LIMIT

10010

STATUS WORD - Bit 9

REMOTE

SUPERVISION

10011

STATUS WORD - Bit 10

ABOVE_LIMIT

REV_REF

10012

STATUS WORD - Bit 11

EXT2

REV_ACT

10013

STATUS WORD - Bit 12

RUN_ENABLE

PANEL_LOCAL

10014

STATUS WORD - Bit 13

N/A

FIELDBUS_LOCAL

10015

STATUS WORD - Bit 14

N/A

EXT2_ACT

10016

STATUS WORD - Bit 15

N/A

FAULT

10017

STATUS WORD - Bit 16

Reserved

ALARM

10018

STATUS WORD - Bit 17

Reserved

REQ_MAINT

10019

STATUS WORD - Bit 18

Reserved

DIRLOCK

10020

STATUS WORD - Bit 19

Reserved

LOCALLOCK

10021

STATUS WORD - Bit 20

Reserved

CTL_MODE

10022

STATUS WORD - Bit 21

Reserved

10023

STATUS WORD - Bit 22

Reserved

10024

STATUS WORD - Bit 23

Reserved

10025

STATUS WORD - Bit 24

Reserved

10026

STATUS WORD - Bit 25

Reserved

10027

STATUS WORD - Bit 26

Reserved

REQ_CTL

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

219

Modbus

Internal location

ABB DRV

DCU PROFILE

ref.

(all profiles)

(5305 = 0 OR 2)

(5305 = 1)

10028

STATUS WORD - Bit 27

Reserved

REQ_REF1

10029

STATUS WORD - Bit 28

Reserved

REQ_REF2

10030

STATUS WORD - Bit 29

Reserved

REQ_REF2EXT

10031

STATUS WORD - Bit 30

Reserved

ACK_STARTINH

10032

STATUS WORD - Bit 31

Reserved

ACK_OFF_ILCK

10033

DI1

10034

DI2

10035

DI3

10036

DI4

10037

DI5

10038

DI6

¹ = Active low

For the 1xxxx registers:

• Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially.

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:

Function code

Description

Read input status

3xxxx Mapping - Modbus inputs. The drive maps the following information to the

3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:

• any user defined analog inputs.

The following table summarizes the input registers:

Modbus

ACS550

Remarks

reference

all profiles

30001

AI1

This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0…100%).

30002

AI2

This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0…100%).

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:

Function code

Description

Read 3xxxx input status

4xxxx Register mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the

4xxxx holding registers as follows:

•

40001…40099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are

described in the table below.

•

40101…49999 map to drive parameters 0101…9999. Register addresses that do

not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to read or

write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface returns an

exception code to the controller.

Embedded fieldbus

220

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001…40099 (for

4xxxx registers above 40099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 40102 is parameter

0102):

Modbus register

Access

Remarks

40001

CONTROL WORD

R/W

Maps directly to the profile‘S CONTROL WORD. Supported only

if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5319 holds

a copy in hex format.

If 5305 = 1 (DCU profile selected), the register remains

empty.

40002

Reference 1

R/W

Range = 0…+20000 (scaled to 0…1105 REF1 MAX), or

-20000…0 (scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX…0).

40003

Reference 2

R/W

Range = 0…+10000 (scaled to 0…1108 REF2 MAX), or

-10000…0 (scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX…0).

40004

STATUS WORD

Maps directly to the profile‘S STATUS WORD. Supported only if

5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5320 holds a

copy in hex format.

If 5305 = 1 (DCU profile selected), the register remains

empty.

40005

Actual 1

By default, stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. Use

(select using 5310)

parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this

40006

Actual 2

By default, stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT. Use parameter

(select using 5311)

5311 to select a different actual value for this register.

40007

Actual 3

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5312 to select an

(select using 5312)

actual value for this register.

40008

Actual 4

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5313 to select an

(select using 5313)

actual value for this register.

40009

Actual 5

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5314 to select an

(select using 5314)

actual value for this register.

40010

Actual 6

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5315 to select an

(select using 5315)

actual value for this register.

40011

Actual 7

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5316 to select an

(select using 5316)

actual value for this register.

40012

Actual 8

By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5317 to select an

(select using 5317)

actual value for this register.

40031

ACS550 CONTROL

R/W

Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU

WORD LSW

profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.

See parameter 0301.

40032

ACS550 CONTROL

Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU

WORD MSW

profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.

See parameter 0302.

40033

ACS550 STATUS

Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU

WORD LSW

profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.

See parameter 0303.

40034

ACS550 STATUS

Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU

WORD MSW

profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.

See parameter 0304.

40045

REFERENCE 1 LSW

R/W

The least significant word of reference 1. Supported only by

the DCU profile i.e. when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is

DCU profile.

Embedded fieldbus

222

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL report the

parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers.

Code

Description

5310

EFB PAR 10

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005.

5311

EFB PAR 11

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006.

5312

EFB PAR 12

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007.

5313

EFB PAR 13

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008.

5314

EFB PAR 14

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009.

5315

EFB PAR 15

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010.

5316

EFB PAR 16

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011.

5317

EFB PAR 17

Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012.

5318

EFB PAR 18

Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins

transmitting response to the master request.

5319

EFB PAR 19

Holds a copy (in hex) of the CONTROL WORD, Modbus register 40001.

5320

EFB PAR 20

Holds a copy (in hex) of the STATUS WORD, Modbus register 40004.

Except where restricted by the drive, all parameters are available for both reading

and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid

Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified

values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607

PARAM SAVE to save all altered values.

The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers:

Function code

Description

Read holding 4xxxx registers

Preset single 4xxxx register

16 (0x10 Hex)

Preset multiple 4xxxx registers

23 (0x17 Hex)

Read/write 4xxxx registers

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

223

Actual values

The contents of the register addresses 40005…40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are:

• specified using parameters 5310…5317

• Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive

•

16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer

• when negative values, written as the two’s complement of the corresponding

positive value

• scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 211.

Exception codes

Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The ACS550

supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.

Exception

Name

Meaning

code

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

Unsupported Command

ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS

The data address received in the query is not allowable. It is not

a defined parameter/group.

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable

value for the ACS550, because it is one of the following:

• Outside min. or max. limits.

• Parameter is read-only.

• Message is too long.

• Parameter write not allowed when start is active.

• Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected.

Embedded fieldbus

224

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB control profiles technical data

Overview

ABB Drives profile

The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple

protocols, including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module. Two

implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available:

• ABB DRV FULL - This implementation standardizes the control interface with

ACS600 and ACS800 drives.

• ABB DRV LIM - This implementation standardizes the control interface with

ACS400 drives. This implementation does not support two control word bits

supported by ABB DRV FULL.

Except as noted, the following “ABB Drives Profile” descriptions apply to both

implementations.

DCU profile

The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits. It is the internal

interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus

environment.

Control Word

The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus

system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive

switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL

WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:

• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling

commands (set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002 EXT2

COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).

• The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control

profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both

parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STD MODBUS) and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL

PROFILE = 2 (ABB DRV FULL).

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

225

ABB Drives profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the

CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 5319)

Commanded

Bit

Name

Value

Comments

state

OFF1

READY TO OPERATE

Enter READY TO OPERATE

CONTROL

EMERGENCY OFF

Drive ramps to stop according to currently

active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE

• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON, unless

other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.

OFF2

OPERATING

Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)

CONTROL

EMERGENCY OFF

Drive coasts to stop.

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE

• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED

OFF3

OPERATING

Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)

CONTROL

EMERGENCY STOP

Drive stops within time specified by parameter

2208.

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE

• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED

WARNING! Be sure motor and driven

equipment can be stopped using this

mode.

INHIBIT

OPERATION

Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run

OPERATION

ENABLED

enable signal must be active. See 1601. If

1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives the

Run Enable signal.)

OPERATION

Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED

INHIBITED

Unused (ABB DRV LIM)

RAMP_OUT_

NORMAL OPERATION

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO

ACCELERATION ENABLED

(ABB DRV FULL)

RFG OUT ZERO

Force ramp function generator output to Zero.

Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage

limits in force).

RAMP_HOLD

RFG OUT ENABLED

Enable ramp function.

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ACCELERATOR ENABLED

RFG OUT HOLD

Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)

RAMP_IN_

RFG INPUT ENABLED

Normal operation. Enter OPERATING

ZERO

RFG INPUT ZERO

Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.

Embedded fieldbus

226

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 5319)

Commanded

Bit

Name

Value

Comments

state

RESET

0=>1

RESET

Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter

SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =

COMM.

OPERATING

Continue normal operation

8…9

Unused

Unused (ABB DRV LIM)

REMOTE_CMD

Fieldbus control enabled.

(ABB DRV FULL)

• CW

0 or Ref

0: Retain last CW and Ref.

• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control

enabled.

• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp are

locked.

EXT CTRL LOC

EXT2 SELECT

Select external control location 2 (EXT2).

Effective if 1102 = COMM.

EXT1 SELECT

Select external control location 1 (EXT1).

Effective if 1102 = COMM.

12…

Unused

DCU Profile

The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.

DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 0301)

Bit

Name

Value

Command/Req.

Comments

STOP

Stop

Stops according to either the stop mode

parameter or the stop mode requests (bits 7

(no op)

and 8).

START

Start

Simultaneous STOP and START commands

result in a stop command.

(no op)

REVERSE

Reverse direction

This bit XOR’d with the sign of the reference

defines direction.

Forward direction

LOCAL

Local mode

When the fieldbus sets this bit, it steals

control and the drive moves to fieldbus local

External mode

control mode.

RESET

-> 1

Reset

Edge sensitive.

other

(no op)

EXT2

Switch to EXT2

Switch to EXT1

RUN_DISABLE

Run disable

Inverted run enable.

Run enable on

STPMODE_R

Normal ramp stop

mode

(no op)

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

227

DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 0301)

Bit

Name

Value

Command/Req.

Comments

STPMODE_EM

Emergency ramp

stop mode

(no op)

STPMODE_C

Coast stop mode

(no op)

RAMP_2

Ramp pair 2

Ramp pair 1

RAMP_OUT_0

Ramp output to 0

(no op)

RAMP_HOLD

Ramp freeze

(no op)

RAMP_IN_0

Ramp input to 0

(no op)

RREQ_LOCALL

Local mode lock

In lock, drive will not switch to local mode.

(no op)

TORQLIM2

Torque limit pair 2

Torque limit pair 1

DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 0302)

Bit

Name

Value

Function

Comments

16…26

Reserved

REF_CONST

Constant speed ref.

These bits are only for supervision

purposes.

(no op)

REF_AVE

Average speed ref.

(no op)

LINK_ON

Master is detected

in link

Link is down

REQ_STARTINH

Start inhibit request

is pending

Start inhibit request

is OFF

OFF_INTERLOCK

Panel OFF button

For the control panel (or PC tool) this is

pressed

the OFF button interlock.

(no op)

Status Word

The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the

master station.

Embedded fieldbus

228

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB Drives profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the

STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives profile (EFB) STATUS WORD (See parameter 5320)

Description

Bit

Name

Value

(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)

RDY_ON

READY TO SWITCH ON

NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

RDY_RUN

READY TO OPERATE

OFF1 ACTIVE

RDY_REF

OPERATION ENABLED

OPERATION INHIBITED

TRIPPED

0…1

FAULT

No fault

OFF_2_STA

OFF2 INACTIVE

OFF2 ACTIVE

OFF_3_STA

OFF3 INACTIVE

OFF3 ACTIVE

SWC_ON_INHIB

SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE

SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE

ALARM

Alarm (See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details on

alarms.)

No alarm

AT_SETPOINT

OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits) the

reference value.

Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to reference

value).

REMOTE

Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)

Drive control location: LOCAL

ABOVE_LIMIT

Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.

Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value < supervision

low limit.

See Group 32: SUPERVISION.

Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.

Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value > supervision

high limit.

See Group 32: SUPERVISION.

EXT CTRL LOC

External control location 2 (EXT2) selected

External control location 1 (EXT1) selected

EXT RUN ENABLE

External Run Enable signal received

No External Run Enable signal received

13…

Unused

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

229

DCU profile

The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.

DCU profile STATUS WORD (See parameter 0303)

Bit

Name

Value

Status

READY

Drive is ready to receive start command.

Drive is not ready.

ENABLED

External run enable signal received.

No external run enable signal received.

STARTED

Drive has received start command.

Drive has not received start command.

RUNNING

Drive is modulating.

Drive is not modulating.

ZERO_SPEED

Drive is at zero speed.

Drive has not reached zero speed.

ACCELERATE

Drive is accelerating.

Drive is not accelerating.

DECELERATE

Drive is decelerating.

Drive is not decelerating.

AT_SETPOINT

Drive is at setpoint.

Drive has not reached setpoint.

LIMIT

Operation is limited by Group 20: LIMITS settings.

Operation is within Group 20: LIMITS settings.

SUPERVISION

A supervised parameter (Group 32: SUPERVISION) is outside

its limits.

All supervised parameters are within limits.

REV_REF

Drive reference is in reverse direction.

Drive reference is in forward direction.

REV_ACT

Drive is running in reverse direction.

Drive is running in forward direction.

PANEL_LOCAL

Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.

Control is not in control panel local mode.

FIELDBUS_LOCAL

Control is in fieldbus local mode (steals control panel local).

Control is not in fieldbus local mode.

EXT2_ACT

Control is in EXT2 mode.

Control is in EXT1 mode.

FAULT

Drive is in a fault state.

Drive is not in a fault state.

Embedded fieldbus

230

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

DCU profile STATUS WORD (See parameter 0304)

Bit

Name

Value

Status

ALARM

An alarm is on.

No alarms are on.

REQ_MAINT

A maintenance request is pending.

No maintenance request is pending.

DIRLOCK

Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)

Direction lock is OFF.

LOCALLOCK

Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)

Local mode lock is OFF.

CTL_MODE

Drive is in vector control mode.

Drive is in scalar control mode.

21…25

Reserved

REQ_CTL

Copy the control word

(no op)

REQ_REF1

Reference 1 requested in this channel.

Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.

REQ_REF2

Reference 2 requested in this channel.

Reference 2 is not requested in this channel.

REQ_REF2EXT

External PID reference 2 requested in this channel.

External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.

ACK_STARTINH

A start inhibit from this channel is granted.

A start inhibit from this channel is not granted.

ACK_OFF_ILCK

Start inhibit due to OFF button

Normal operation

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

231

State diagram

ABB Drives profile

To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABB DRV LIM

implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the drive:

• First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met. See above.

• When the power is first connected, the state of the drive is not ready to switch on.

See dotted lined path (

) in the state diagram below.

• Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the

OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the drive is running and follows the

given reference. See the table below.

Step

CONTROL WORD Value

Description

CW = 0000 0000 0000 0110

This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH

ON.

bit 15

bit 0

Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding.

CW = 0000 0000 0000 0111

This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE.

CW = 0000 0000 0000 1111

This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED.

The drive starts, but will not accelerate.

CW = 0000 0000 0010 1111

This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)

output and changes the drive state to RFG: ACCELERATOR

ENABLED.

CW = 0000 0000 0110 1111

This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)

output and changes the drive state to OPERATING. The drive

accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference.

Embedded fieldbus

232

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)

and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.

From any state

Emergency Stop

Emergency Off

Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)

OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3

OFF2

FAULT

(SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0)

(SW Bit4=0)

ACTIVE

(CW Bit7=1)**

n(f)=0 / I=0

From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

SWITCH-ON

MAINS OFF

(SW Bit6=1)

OFF1

INHIBITED

(SW Bit1=0)

ACTIVE

Power ON

(CW Bit0=0)

n(f)=0 / I=0

C D

NOT READY

(SW Bit0=0)

TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0)

(CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

OPERATION

READY TO

(SW Bit2=0)

(SW Bit0=1)

INHIBITED

SWITCH ON

OPERATION INHIBITED

(CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

C* D*

READY TO

(SW Bit1=1)

OPERATE

(CW Bit4=0)*

(CW Bit3=1 and

SW Bit12=1)

OPERATION

(SW Bit2=1)

C D

ENABLED

(CW Bit5=0)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1* 1111

i.e. Bit 4=1)*

KEY

RFG OUTPUT

ENABLED*

State

State change

(CW Bit6=0)

Path described in example

(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11* 1111

i.e. Bit 5=1)

CW = CONTROL WORD

SW = STATUS WORD

RFG: ACCELERATOR

RFG = Ramp Function Generator

ENABLED

I = Param. 0104 CURRENT

(CW=xxxx x1xx x111* 1111

f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ

i.e. Bit 6=1)

n = Speed

* Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM

OPERATING

(SW Bit8=1)

** This state transition also occurs if the fault is

reset from any other source (e.g. digital input).

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

233

Reference scaling

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following tables.

Fieldbus scaling for ABB Drives profile

Reference

Range

Scaling

Remarks

type

REF1

-32767

Speed or

-20000 = -(par. 1105)

Final reference limited by

…

frequency

0 = 0

1104/1105. Actual motor

+32767

+20000 = (par. 1105)

speed limited by 2001/2002

(speed) or 2007/2008

(20000 corresponds to 100%)

(frequency).

REF2

-32767

Speed or

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

…

frequency

0 = 0

1107/1108. Actual motor

+32767

+10000 = (par. 1108)

speed limited by 2001/2002

(speed) or 2007/2008

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

(frequency).

Torque

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

0 = 0

2015/2017 (torque1) or 2016/

+10000 = (par. 1108)

2018 (torque2).

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

PID

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

Reference

0 = 0

4012/4013 (PID set1) or

+10000 = (par. 1108)

4112/4113 (PID set2).

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on

the scaling of references.

Fieldbus scaling for DCU profile

Reference

Range

Scaling

Remarks

type

REF1

-214783648

Speed or

1000 = 1 rpm / 1 Hz

Final reference limited by

frequency

1104/1105. Actual motor

…

speed limited by 2001/2002

+214783647

(speed) or 2007/2008

(frequency).

REF2

-214783648

Speed or

1000 = 1%

Final reference limited by

…

frequency

1107/1108. Actual motor

+214783647

speed limited by 2001/2002

(speed) or 2007/2008

(frequency).

Torque

1000 = 1%

Final reference limited by

2015/2017 (torque1) or 2016/

2018 (torque2).

PID

1000 = 1%

Final reference limited by

Reference

4012/4013 (PID set1) or

4112/4113 (PID set2).

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on

the scaling of references.

Embedded fieldbus

234

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Scaling examples

When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or

^COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives and DCU profiles

Value

Reference

AI reference scaling

setting

REF1

COMM+AI1

COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5 · REF1 MAX (%))

Fieldbus reference

correction coefficient

(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1105)%

100%

AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%

50%

100%

REF1

COMM (%) · (AI (%) / 0.5 · REF1 MAX (%))

^COMM*AI1

Fieldbus reference

correction coefficient

200%

100%

AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%

50%

100%

REF2

COMM+AI1

COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5 · REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus reference

correction coefficient

(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1108)%

100%

AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1108)%

50%

100%

Embedded fieldbus

236

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Reference handling

Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation

direction for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate

how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce

REFERENCE values (REF1 and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is

they can be positive or negative.

ABB Drives profile

Parameter

Value setting

AI reference scaling

1003 DIRECTION

1 (FORWARD)

Resultant ref.

Max. ref

Fieldbus

reference

-163% -100%

100%

163%

-(Max. ref.)

1003 DIRECTION

2 (REVERSE)

Max. ref

Resultant ref.

Fieldbus

-163% -100%

100%

163%

reference

-(Max. ref.)

1003 DIRECTION

3 (REQUEST)

Resultant ref.

Max. ref

-163% -100%

Fieldbus

reference

100% 163%

-(Max. ref.)

Embedded fieldbus

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

237

Fieldbus adapter

Overview

The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard

serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can

either:

• receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or

• be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available

control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.

Fieldbus controller

Fieldbus

Other devices

Connect using either:

• standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at

terminals X1:28…32

fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted

•

in slot 2 (option Rxxx)

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• embedded fieldbus (EFB) - See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 203.

• fieldbus adapter (FBA) - With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive’s

expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the

following protocols:

- PROFIBUS DP

- Ethernet (Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, EtherCAT, PROFINET IO, POWERLINK)

- CANopen

- DeviceNet

- ControlNet.

The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the

plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the

profile used is the protocol’s industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFIdrive for

PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be

configured for the ABB Drives profile.

Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are

provided in a user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in

section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248.

Fieldbus adapter

238

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Control interface

In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive

consists of:

• Output Words:

- CONTROL WORD

- REFERENCE (speed or frequency)

- Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words. Protocols limits

may further restrict the total.

• Input Words:

- STATUS WORD

- Actual Value (speed or frequency)

- Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words. Protocols limits may

further restrict the total.

Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller

point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller

to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550.

However, the profile used may set particular meanings.

Fieldbus controller

Fieldbus

Control Word (CW)

References

Process I/O

(cyclic)

Status Word (SW)

Actual Values

Service

Messages

Parameter R/W Requests/Responses

(Acyclic)

Control Word

The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus

system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive

switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL

WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:

• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling

commands from EXT1 (set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL).

• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated:

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

239

- Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXT FBA).

- The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile

mode or drive profile objects.

The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol/profile used. See the

user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or section ABB Drives profile

technical data on page 248.

Status Word

The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive to

the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol/

profile used. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or section

ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248.

Reference

The contents of each REFERENCE word:

• can be used, as speed or frequency reference

• is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer

• Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the

two’s complement of the corresponding positive reference value.

The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is

configured for the ABB Drives profile.

Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user’s manual provided with the

FBA module and/or the following sections as appropriate:

• Reference scaling on page 252 (ABB Drives profile technical data)

• Reference scaling on page 256 (Generic profile technical data).

Actual Values

Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the

drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters)

can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE parameters

(protocol-dependent, but typically parameters 5104…5126).

Planning

Network planning should address the following questions:

• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?

• What control information must be sent down to the drives?

• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling

system?

Fieldbus adapter

240

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Mechanical and electrical installation - FBA

WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from

the power source.

Overview

The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the drive’s expansion slot

2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The

screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND

signals to the drive control board.

On installation of the module, electrical connection to the drive is automatically

established through the 34-pin connector.

Mounting procedure

Note: Install the input power and motor cables first.

Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2

until the retaining clips lock the module into position.

Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.

Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of

the module.

X00301

Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and

install the cable clamp for the network cable.

Route the network cable through the cable clamp.

Connect the network cable to the module’s network

connector.

Tighten the cable clamp.

Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).

For configuration information see the following:

X00302

• section Communication set-up - FBA on page 241

• section Activate drive control functions - FBA on page 241

• The protocol specific documentation provided with the module.

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

241

Communication set-up - FBA

Serial communication selection

To activate the serial communication, use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL. Set 9802

= 4 (EXT FBA).

Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the

appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.

These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user’s manual supplied with

the FBA module.

• Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.

• Parameters 5102…5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the

profile used and additional I/O words. These parameters are referred to as the

fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA

module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.

• Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102…5126. If

parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102…5126 take affect only

after the drive power is cycled.

• Parameters 5128…5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed

(e.g. component versions and status).

See Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions.

Activate drive control functions - FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:

• tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function

• define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control

• define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.

The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for

each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See

the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.

Start/Stop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location

is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1001

EXT1

10 (COMM)

Start/Stop controlled by fieldbus with

COMMANDS

Ext1 selected.

Fieldbus adapter

242

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1002

EXT2

10 (COMM)

Start/Stop by controlled fieldbus with

COMMANDS

Ext2 selected.

1003

DIRECTION

3 (REQUEST)

Direction controlled by fieldbus.

Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:

• drive parameter value set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1102

EXT1/EXT2 SEL

8 (COMM)

Ref. selected by fieldbus.

(Required only if 2 references used.)

1103

REF1 SELECT

8 (COMM)

Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus.

9 (COMM+AI1)

10 (COMM

*AI1)

1106

REF2 SELECT

8 (COMM)

Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus.

9 (COMM+AI)

(Required only if 2 references used.)

10 (COMM

*AI)

Note: Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.

Scaling

Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following sections, as

appropriate:

• Reference scaling on page 252 (ABB Drives profile technical data)

• Reference scaling on page 256 (Generic profile technical data).

System control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location is

defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1601

RUN ENABLE

7 (COMM)

Run enable by fieldbus.

1604

FAULT RESET SEL

8 (COMM)

Fault reset by fieldbus.

1607

PARAM SAVE

1 (SAVE)

Saves altered parameters to memory (then

value returns to 0).

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

243

Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate

location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol

dependent.)

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1401

RELAY OUTPUT 1

35 (COMM)

Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus.

36 (COMM(-1))

1402

RELAY OUTPUT 2

Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus.

1403

RELAY OUTPUT 3

Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.

1410¹

RELAY OUTPUT 4

Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus.

1411¹

RELAY OUTPUT 5

Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus.

1412¹

RELAY OUTPUT 6

Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus.

¹ More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Drive parameter

Value

Protocol reference

0122

RO 1-3 STATUS

Relay 1…3 status.

0123

RO 4-6 STATUS

Relay 4…6 status.

Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:

• drive parameter values set as defined below

• fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Description

reference

1501

AO1 CONTENT SEL

135 (COMM VALUE 1)

Analog Output 1 controlled by

writing to parameter 0135.

0135

COMM VALUE 1

1502

AO1 CONTENT MIN

Set appropriate

Used for scaling

…

values.

1505

MAXIMUM AO1

1506

FILTER AO1

Filter time constant for AO1.

1507

AO2 CONTENT SEL

136 (COMM VALUE 2)

Analog Output 2 controlled by

writing to parameter 0136.

0136

COMM VALUE 2

1508

AO2 CONTENT MIN

Set appropriate

Used for scaling

…

values.

1511

MAXIMUM AO2

1512

FILTER AO2

Filter time constant for AO2.

Fieldbus adapter

244

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

PID Control setpoint source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID

loops:

Protocol

Drive parameter

Value

Setting

reference

4010

SET POINT SEL (Set 1)

8 (COMM VALUE 1)

Setpoint is input reference 2

(+/-/* AI1)

9 (COMM+AI1)

4110

SET POINT SEL (Set 2)

10 (COMM*AI1)

4210

SET POINT SEL (Ext/Trim)

Communication fault

When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.

Drive parameter

Value

Description

3018

COMM FAULT FUNC

0 (NOT SEL)

Set for appropriate drive

response.

1 (FAULT)

2 (CONST SP7)

3 (LAST SPEED)

3019

COMM FAULT TIME

Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.

Feedback from the drive - FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the

protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists

a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in

section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106.

Drive parameter

Protocol reference

0102

SPEED

0103

OUTPUT FREQ

0104

CURRENT

0105

TORQUE

0106

POWER

0107

DC BUS VOLTAGE

0109

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

0301

FB CMD WORD 1 - bit 0 (STOP)

0301

FB CMD WORD 1 - bit 2 (REV)

0118

DI 1-3 STATUS - bit 0 (DI3)

Scaling

To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections, as appropriate:

• Actual Value scaling on page 255 (ABB Drives profile technical data)

• Actual Value scaling on page 257 (Generic profile technical data).

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

245

Diagnostics - FBA

Fault handling

The ACS550 provides fault information as follows:

• The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See chapter Diagnostics

on page 259 for a complete description.

• Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2

store the most recent faults.

• For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned

and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See the table below. Not all

profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that

support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault

request process.

Fieldbus fault code

Drive fault code

(DRIVECOM

specification)

OVERCURRENT

2310h

DC OVERVOLT

3210h

DEV OVERTEMP

4210h

sHORT CIRC

2340h

Reserved

FF6Bh

DC UNDERVOLT

3220h

AI1 LOSS

8110h

AI2 LOSS

8110h

MOT OVERTEMP

4310h

PANEL LOSS

5300h

ID RUN FAIL

FF84h

MOTOR STALL

7121h

EXT FAULT 1

9000h

EXT FAULT 2

9001h

EARTH FAULT

2330h

Obsolete

FF6Ah

THERM FAIL

5210h

OPEX LINK

7500h

OPEX PWR

5414h

CURR MEAS

2211h

SUPPLY PHASE

3130h

ENCODER ERR

7301h

OVERSPEED

7310h

Reserved

FF80h

DRIVE ID

5400h

Fieldbus adapter

246

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Fieldbus fault code

Drive fault code

(DRIVECOM

specification)

CONFIG FILE

630Fh

SERIAL 1 ERR

7510h

EFB CON FILE

6306h

FORCE TRIP

FF90h

EFB 1

FF92h

EFB 2

FF93h

EFB 3

FF94h

MOTOR PHASE

FF56h

OUTP WIRING

FF95h

INCOMPATIBLE SW

630Fh

CB OVERTEMP

4110h

USER LOAD CURVE

FF6Bh

101

SERF CORRUPT

FF55h

102

Reserved

FF55h

103

SERF MACRO

FF55h

104

Reserved

FF55h

105

Reserved

FF55h

201

DSP T1 OVERLOAD

6100h

202

DSP T2 OVERLOAD

6100h

203

DSP T3 OVERLOAD

6100h

204

DSP STACK ERROR

6100h

205

Reserved (obsolete)

5000h

206

CB ID ERROR

5000h

207

EFB LOAD ERROR

6100h

1000

PAR HZRPM

6320h

1001

PAR PFC REF NEG

6320h

1002

Reserved (obsolete)

6320h

1003

PAR AI SCALE

6320h

1004

PAR AO SCALE

6320h

1005

PAR PCU 2

6320h

1006

PAR EXT RO

6320h

1007

PAR FIELDBUS MISSING

6320h

1008

PAR PFC MODE

6320h

1009

PAR PCU 1

6320h

1012

PAR PFC IO 1

6320h

1013

PAR PFC IO 2

6320h

1014

PAR PFC IO 3

6320h

1016

PAR USER LOAD C

6320h

Fieldbus adapter

248

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB Drives profile technical data

Overview

The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple

protocols, including protocols available on the FBA module. This section describes

the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules.

Control Word

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the CONTROL WORD is

the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the

CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Bit

Name

Value

Commanded state

Comments

OFF1

READY TO OPERATE

Enter READY TO OPERATE

CONTROL

EMERGENCY OFF

Drive ramps to stop according to currently

active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE

• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,

unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are

active.

OFF2

OPERATING

Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)

CONTROL

EMERGENCY OFF

Drive coasts to stop.

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE

• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED

OFF3

OPERATING

Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)

CONTROL

EMERGENCY STOP

Drive stops within in time specified by

parameter 2208.

Normal command sequence:

• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE

• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED

WARNING! Be sure motor and

driven equipment can be stopped

using this mode.

INHIBIT

OPERATION

Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run

OPERATION

ENABLED

enable signal must be active. See 1601. If

1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives

the Run Enable signal.)

OPERATION

Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION

INHIBITED

RAMP_OUT_

NORMAL OPERATION

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO

ACCELERATION ENABLED

RFG OUT ZERO

Force ramp function generator output to

Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC

voltage limits in force).

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

249

ABB Drives profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Bit

Name

Value

Commanded state

Comments

RAMP_HOLD

RFG OUT ENABLED

Enable ramp function.

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ACCELERATOR ENABLED

RFG OUT HOLD

Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)

RAMP_IN_

RFG INPUT ENABLED

Normal operation. Enter OPERATING

ZERO

RFG INPUT ZERO

Force Ramp Function Generator input to

zero.

RESET

0=>1

RESET

Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter

SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =

COMM.

OPERATING

Continue normal operation

8…9

Unused

REMOTE_CMD

Fieldbus control enabled

• CW

0 or Ref

0: Retain last CW and

Ref.

• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control

enabled.

• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp

are locked.

EXT CTRL LOC

EXT2 SELECT

Select external control location 2 (EXT2).

Effective if 1102 = COMM.

EXT1 SELECT

Select external control location 1 (EXT1).

Effective if 1102 = COMM.

12…15

Unused

Status Word

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the contents of the

STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. The

following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the status

word content.

ABB Drives profile (FBA) STATUS WORD

Description

Bit

Name

Value

(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)

RDY_ON

READY TO SWITCH ON

NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

RDY_RUN

READY TO OPERATE

OFF1 ACTIVE

RDY_REF

OPERATION ENABLED

OPERATION INHIBITED

TRIPPED

0…1

FAULT

No fault

Fieldbus adapter

250

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

ABB Drives profile (FBA) STATUS WORD

Description

Bit

Name

Value

(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)

OFF_2_STA

OFF2 inactive

OFF2 ACTIVE

OFF_3_STA

OFF3 inactive

OFF3 ACTIVE

SWC_ON_INHIB

SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE

SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE

ALARM

Alarm (See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details

on alarms.)

No alarm

AT_SETPOINT

OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)

the reference value.

Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to

reference value).

REMOTE

Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)

Drive control location: LOCAL

ABOVE_LIMIT

Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.

Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <

supervision low limit.

See Group 32: SUPERVISION.

Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.

Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >

supervision high limit.

See Group 32: SUPERVISION.

EXT CTRL LOC

External control location 2 (EXT2) selected

External control location 1 (EXT1) selected

EXT RUN ENABLE

External Run Enable signal received

No External Run Enable signal received

13… 15

Unused

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

251

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)

and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.

From any state

Emergency Stop

Emergency Off

Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)

OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3

OFF2

FAULT

(SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0)

(SW Bit4=0)

ACTIVE

(CW Bit7=1)

n(f)=0 / I=0

From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

SWITCH-ON

MAINS OFF

(SW Bit6=1)

OFF1

INHIBITED

(SW Bit1=0)

ACTIVE

Power ON

(CW Bit0=0)

n(f)=0 / I=0

C D

NOT READY

(SW Bit0=0)

TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0)

(CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

OPERATION

READY TO

(SW Bit2=0)

(SW Bit0=1)

INHIBITED

SWITCH ON

OPERATION INHIBITED

(CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

C D

READY TO

(SW Bit1=1)

OPERATE

(CW Bit4=0)

(CW Bit3=1 and

SW Bit12=1)

OPERATION

C D

(SW Bit2=1)

ENABLED

(CW Bit5=0)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

RFG OUTPUT

ENABLED

(CW Bit6=0)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)

KEY

State

State change

RFG: ACCELERATOR

ENABLED

CW = CONTROL WORD

SW = STATUS WORD

(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)

RFG = Ramp Function Generator

I = Param. 0104 CURRENT

OPERATING

(SW Bit8=1)

f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ

n = Speed

Fieldbus adapter

252

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Reference

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the REFERENCE word is

a speed or frequency reference.

Reference scaling

The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives Profile (FBA)

Reference

Range

Scaling

Remarks

type

REF1

-32767…

Speed or

-20000 = -(par. 1105)

Final reference limited by

+32767

frequency

0 = 0

1104/1105. Actual motor

+20000 = (par. 1105)

speed limited by 2001/2002

(speed) or 2007/2008

(20000 corresponds to 100%)

(frequency).

REF2

-32767…

Speed or

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

+32767

frequency

0 = 0

1107/1108. Actual motor

+10000 = (par. 1108)

speed limited by 2001/2002

(speed) or 2007/2008

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

(frequency).

Torque

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

0 = 0

2015/2017 (torque1) or

+10000 = (par. 1108)

2016/2018 (torque2).

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

PID

-10000 = -(par. 1108)

Final reference limited by

Reference

0 = 0

4012/4013 (PID set1) or

+10000 = (par. 1108)

4112/4113 (PID set2).

(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on

the scaling of references.

When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or

COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives profile (FBA)

Reference

Value setting

AI reference scaling

REF1

COMM+AI1

COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5 · REF1 MAX (%))

Fieldbus reference

correction coefficient

(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1105)%

100%

AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%

50%

100%

Fieldbus adapter

254

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Reference handling

Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation

direction for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate

how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce

REFERENCE values (REF1 and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is

they can be positive or negative.

ABB Drives profile

Parameter

Value setting

AI reference scaling

1003 DIRECTION

1 (FORWARD)

Resultant ref.

Max. ref

Fieldbus

reference

-163% -100%

100%

163%

-(Max. ref.)

1003 DIRECTION

2 (REVERSE)

Max. ref

Resultant ref.

Fieldbus

-163% -100%

100%

163%

reference

-(Max. ref.)

1003 DIRECTION

3 (REQUEST)

Resultant ref.

Max. ref

-163% -100%

Fieldbus

reference

100% 163%

-(Max. ref.)

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

255

Actual Value

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, Actual Values are

words containing drive values.

Actual Value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the

resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below,

scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section

Complete parameter list on page 91. For example:

Feedback integer

Parameter resolution

Scaled Value

0.1 mA

1 · 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA

0.1%

10 · 0.1% = 1%

Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives profile

Contents

Scaling

ACT1

ACTUAL SPEED

-20000 … +20000 = -(par. 1105) … +(par. 1105)

ACT2

TORQUE

-10000 … +10000 = -100% … +100%

Virtual addresses of the drive control

The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows:

Control Word

Reference 1 (REF1)

Reference 2 (REF2)

Status Word

Actual Value 1 (ACT1)

Actual Value 2 (ACT2)

Fieldbus adapter

256

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

Generic profile technical data

Overview

The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol

(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet).

Control Word

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the CONTROL WORD is

the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific

CONTROL WORD content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Status Word

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the contents of the

STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. For

specific STATUS WORD content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Reference

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the REFERENCE word is

a speed or frequency reference.

Note: REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.

Reference scaling

REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of a

100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed

description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user’s manual

supplied with the FBA module.

Generic profile

Reference

Range

Scaling

Remarks

type

REF

Fieldbus

Speed

-100% = -(par. 9908)

Final reference limited by

specific

0 = 0

1104/1105.

+100 = (par. 9908)

Actual motor speed limited by 2001/

2002 (speed).

Frequency

-100% = -(par. 9907)

Final reference limited by

0 = 0

1104/1105.

+100 = (par. 9907)

Actual motor speed limited by 2007/

2008 (frequency).

Actual Values

As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, Actual Values are

words containing drive values.

Fieldbus adapter

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual

257

Actual Value scaling

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See

section Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions.) For example:

Feedback

(Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) =

Parameter resolution

integer

Scaled Value

0.1 mA

1 · 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA

0.1%

10 · 0.1% = 1%

Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameter list section specifies

what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from percent to

engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100% and

divide by 100%. For example:

Value of the

(Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) ·

Feedback

Parameter

parameter that

(Value of 100% ref.) / 100% =

integer

resolution

defines 100%

Scaled Value

0.1%

1500 rpm¹

10 · 0.1% · 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm

100

0.1%

500 Hz²

100 · 0.1% · 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz

¹ Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED

as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.

² Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ

as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.

Actual Value mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus adapter